Sports Series

SPORTS SERIES

OWNER’S HANDBOOK ASSISTANCE ✆ ☎ ✄ ❆ ✂ ✁ ❆ Retailer Network

✏ ✚ ✎ ✏ ✏ ✛ ✚ ✙ ✘ ✘ ✗ ✖ ✕ ✔ ✠ ✓ ✒ ✑ ✏ ✎ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✌ ☞ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ McLaren Client Services UK business hours: McLaren Beverly Hills 24 hours: +1 818 585 9620 +44 148 326 1500 [email protected] McLaren Calabasas 24 hours: +1 818 585 9620 If you have been unable to obtain assistance using the number(s) McLaren Chicago 24 hours: +1 773 547 3877 listed for towing/roadside assistance, or the dealer is unable to McLaren Dallas 24 hours: +1 214 497 1082 provide towing/roadside assistance, please call 855-4McLaren (855- McLaren Greenwich 24 hours: +1 203 537 9128 462-5273). McLaren Long Island 24 hours: +1 516 478 4326 McLaren Mexico City 24 hours: To be confirmed The Collection McLaren (Miami) 24 hours: +1 305 442 9696 McLaren Newport Beach 24 hours: +1 714 252 3284 McLaren Philadelphia 24 hours: +1 610 886 3000 McLaren San Francisco 24 hours: +1 650 815 4472 McLaren Santiago 24 hours: +56 994 496 824 McLaren Scottsdale 24 hours: +1 480 544 5592 McLaren Tampa Bay 24 hours: +1 727 537 0626 McLaren Toronto 24 hours: +1 416 877 2620 McLaren Vancouver 24 hours: +1 888 683 3757 McLaren Washington DC 24 hours: +1 610 886 3000 CONTENTS

❇ EFORE Y OU D RIVE...... 1 .1

DRIVING C ONTROLS ...... 2 .1

INSTRUMENTS...... 3 .1

COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE...... 4 .1

MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN...... 5 .1

VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY ...... 6 .1

INDEX ...... 7.1 INTRODUCTION ✄ ✜ ✁ ✂ ☎ ✣ ✢ ✜ ■ ✂ ✄ ✁ Introduction ✡ ★ ✥ ✠ ✟ ✥ ✍ ✥ ✧ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✪ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✰ ✯ ✬ ✮ ✪ ✭ ✬ ✫ ✪ ✩ something should go wrong and how to

✡ ✑ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✧ ✡ ✒ yourself✌ ✤ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✓ with✔ ✒ ✡ ✑ ✌ your✔ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✡ McLaren and its features ✵ ✳ ✴ ❉ manage any possible problems which arise as before you drive. This provides the necessary cockpit to ensure you are fully prepared and a result. Information on fuses, lights and what information for you to get the optimum have safe and easy access to all controls to do if you experience a puncture. benefit and enjoyment from your McLaren. before driving. ❈ ❀ ❈ ❈ ❈ This publication describes all options and ✽ ✽ ✮ ✭ ✬ ✼ ✶ ❊ ✱ ✪ ✰ ❅ ✼ ✻ ✸ ✪ ❱ ✤ ✡ ✡ ☛ ☛ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✡ ✓ ✌ ✑ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✦ ✡ ✽ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✻ ✸ ✬ ✺ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✶ features available for the McLaren Sports ❋ ✴ ❘

☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✡ ✤ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ information regarding the fluids and Series. Certain descriptions, including those quantities that are required for the various for display and menu functions, may not apply regarding the equipment and driving controls systems on your McLaren, or when you need to your vehicle due to model variant, country fitted to your McLaren and how to use those to know a specific piece of data relating to specifications, optional equipment or the controls to best effect during a journey. your McLaren or its performance. fitment of McLaren approved accessories. ✿ ✾ ✽ ✯ ✻ ✭ ✻ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✸ The technical glossary contains a brief NOTE: The images shown in this ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ explanation of some of the more complex publication may not exactly reflect your instrument cluster, including information of systems fitted to your McLaren. Your McLaren unique vehicle. how to view and change vehicle settings. Retailer will be able to assist should you need The documents supplied with your McLaren more information. ❀ ✿ ❈ are an integral part of the vehicle. Ensure✸ ✪ ✱ ✪ ✸ that✪ ✲ ✸ ✬ ✺ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✺ ✰ ✬ ✸ ✫ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✒ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✴ ❁ ● ✾ you pass them onto the new owner if you sell ✪ ✰ ✸ features which make the cockpit a pleasant ✍ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✦ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ❚ the vehicle. ❑ ❋ ❏ ❍ environment in which to spend time. The information is divided into specific you find information quickly, when you need it. ❈ ❃ ❀ ❂ ❈ ❈ ❂ sections, to assist in finding the particular✸ ✪ ✭ ✭ ✯ ✬ ✮ ✹ ✸ ✻ ✱ ✸ ✸ ✱ ✱ information you require: ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ☛ ✥ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✧ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ❄ ✴ ✳ here. Also included is advice on using your McLaren in winter weather and if you choose to drive your vehicle abroad, what to do if ✷ INTRODUCTION

Information about this document Electronic User Manual ✠ ✡ ✔ ✓ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ☛ ✤ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✠ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ✍ ✌ ✓ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ❋ ✴ ✴ ❑ dating its vehicles to specifications contained in these applications meet and exceed the latest technologies. are for information purposes only and manual, the Owner!s Handbook and IRIS User McLaren therefore reserves the right to McLaren Automotive reserves the right to Guide are available on the IRIS screen. introduce changes in design, equipment and change product specifications at any time technical features at any time. without notice or incurring obligation. For full © McLaren Automotive Limited. specification details and information on standard and optional equipment, please This publication must not be reproduced, consult your authorized McLaren Retailer. translated or reprinted, in whole or in part, without written permission from McLaren This vehicle may be covered by patents. See Automotive Limited. cars.mclaren.com/patents. The equipment fitted to your McLaren may Printed in United Kingdom, 13Q0071CP.01 vary from that shown depending on vehicle and market specification. Your McLaren may vary from the images shown depending on vehicle and market specification. All information, illustrations and specifications in our applications are based on data available and are correct at the time of issue. The availability of options may vary To access the manuals, navigate to the APPS from market to market due to local screen and select USER MANUAL. This will restrictions and regulations. Some launch the user manual application. illustrations in this applications may not necessarily reflect the specifications or options available in your local market and may show optional equipment. The ▲ INTRODUCTION ❳ ❙ ❪ ❄ ✠ ❙ ❄ ✒ ❭ ❲ ◗ ☞ ◗ ❳ ❩ ❬ ❲ ❙ ❨ ❯ ◗ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ❘ ❘ ❉ ❘ Select the chapter required, this will take you Select the section required from the chapter GUIDE to access the information. to the chapter contents page. contents to access the required information. NOTE: Selecting the INDEX from the When the section is displayed, the screen can main contents page will navigate you to be scrolled by touching the screen and an alphabetical index of topics covered dragging a finger up or down as required. in the Owner!s Handbook. The INDEX is Hotspot links are identified by orange not available for the IRIS User Guide. underlined text. Selecting a hotspot link will navigate you to the information identified in the text. ❖ INTRODUCTION

Symbols Operating safety ✒ ✍ ✍ ✒ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✦ ✥ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✧ ✤ ✔ ✍ ✓ ☛ ✥ ✒ ✦ ✒ ✍ ❴ ✍ ✥ ✿ ❀ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ❋ ✳ ✴ ❍ ❋ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✱ ✮ ✽ ✸ ✪ ✽ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✪ ✻ ❊ ✪ ❅ ✒ ✌ ✦ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✠ ✟ ✟ ✡ ☛ ✠ ✥ ✒ ✟ ✞ ✝ ✠ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❍ ✴ the main contents page. Selecting the Owner!s handbook. These symbols are fitted to your McLaren interact with library button will return you to the library intended to give you an instant visual each other. Tampering with these where all available owner information can be message on what type of information is being systems could cause malfunctions in accessed. displayed. other interconnected systems. Such faults could seriously endanger the The Home icon appears at the top and ❈ ❵ ✽ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✸ ✭ operational safety of your McLaren the bottom of each page. Selecting the and your own safety. home button will return you to the main A warning draws your attention to contents page. activities that could cause injury or Additional work or modifications made to the vehicle, which have been The icons at the bottom of the death. carried out incorrectly can also affect screen (end of the section) can Notes its operating safety. be used to navigate to the previous or next ❀ section as required. Notes draw your attention to ✪ ✽ ✯ ✱ ✪ ❅ ✼ ✪ ❱ ✠ ✓ ☛ ✥ ✒ ✔ ✓ ✒ ✍ ✍ ☛ ✡ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ◗ ✠ ✡ ✔ activities that✴ ✳ contain❋ ❋ ✳ possible❍ risks to your McLaren, provide advice that McLaren: you may find useful, or give additional • the safety notes throughout this information regarding a particular information subject. • road traffic laws and regulations Environmental notes WARNING: There are various warning Environmental notes give you tips on labels attached to your McLaren. minimizing the impact of you and These are intended to make you and your vehicle on the environment. others aware of various risks. Do not remove any warning labels from the vehicle. ❫ INTRODUCTION ❡ ❀ ❈ ❈ ❈ ✿ ✾ ❀ ❈ ❈ ❀ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✰ ✭ ❥ ✐ ✽ ✼ ✼ ✪ ✹ ❤ ✸ ❣ ✱ ✪ ✸ ✽ ✭ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✲ ✯ ✬ ✬ ✮ ✫ ✰ ✸ ✪ ✯ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✭ ❊ ✸ ✪ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✧ ✒ ✓ ✦ ✒ ✠ ✧ ✡ ✥ ✡ ✌ ◆ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✝ ✟ ✒ ❚ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❈ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ❈ ❵ ❑ ❑ you or others✪ ✰ ✱ ✽ may✭ ✪ ✰ ✸ not✯ ✪ then❅ ✻ ✬ ✻ ❊ be✪ ✹ ✶ aware of dangers, which may result in an of the vehicle may occur when reliability it is important to ensure the injury. approaching steep inclines or following preconditions are met before declines. attempting to drive your vehicle on a track: Drive with care when: • engine oil is at normal operating • approaching kerbs temperature • • approaching steep inclines engine coolant is at normal operating temperature • departing steep declines • tires should not exceed the safe • driving on rough roads operating temperatures • driving in areas where traffic calming measures have been deployed NOTE: Before you use your vehicle on the track, consult your McLaren Retailer. • driving in any other environment where McLaren recommend that your vehicle sudden change of road surface height or is inspected before and after track use. elevation are encountered such as car parks NOTE: Always drive within your limits and the limits of the vehicle. See Vehicle dimensions, page 6.7. ✸ ❣ ✬ ✰ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✼ ✬ ✬ ✺ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✒ ✒ ✝ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✌ ✤ ✡ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✒ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✡ ❯ ✵ ✴ vehicle during track driving due to the high temperatures that may be generated by the brakes and transmission which could affect performance. Time should be taken to drive the vehicle at a slower speed without using ❢ INTRODUCTION

Stored Data ☛ ✠ ✥ ✓ ✔ ✌ ✒ ☛ ✧ ✡ ✒ ☛ ✝ ✒ ✦ ✧ ✒ ✓ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ ❑ ❍ ✡ ✠ ◆ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✟ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✥ ✟ ✑ ☛ ✝ ✓ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✳ ❍ ✴ ❏ ✵ ✳ ✳ • assist in recognizing and rectifying faults changes, this uses the airflow to cool the vehicle which collect data and store it and defects vehicle. temporarily or permanently. This technical • analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an data provides information relating to areas We recommend that time is allowed for your accident such as the condition of the vehicle, any vehicle to return to normal operating • optimize vehicle functions temperatures before leaving the track. events which have taken place and any malfunctions your vehicle may be The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle!s NOTE: When stopping the vehicle experiencing or has experienced in the past. movements. directly after performance driving we These include, for example: When your vehicle is serviced, technical recommend that the ignition is not information can be read from the vehicle • immediately switched off or the parking operating conditions of system including: brake is applied. We recommend that the components, e.g. fluid levels • engine is left to idle prior to the ignition • the vehicle!s status messages and those repair service history being switched off. of its individual components, e.g. • warranty events NOTE: Please refer to your Service & Windscreen Washer Fluid Low • quality assurance Warranty Guide for track and • malfunctions and defects in important This information can be read by employees of competition use implications. system components, e.g. Light Switch the service network (including Fault manufacturers) using special diagnostic • vehicle reactions and operating testers. More detailed information can be conditions in special driving situations, obtained from it, if required. e.g. air bag deployment After a fault has been rectified, the • ambient conditions, e.g. outside information is deleted from the fault memory temperature or is continually overwritten. This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: ❦ INTRODUCTION ✟ ✧ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✓ ✡ ✍ ✌ ✥ ✝ ✔ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✑ ✟ ✌ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✑ ❯ ✴ ♠ ✳ ❑ • to make it available for research needs occur where technical data, in connection where appropriate confidentiality is with other information, could be traced to a maintained and need is shown person. • to share summary data which is not tied Examples include: to a specific vehicle with other organizations for research purposes • accident reports • damage to the vehicle • witness statements McLaren will not access your behavior related information about a crash event or share it with others except: • with the consent of you or, if the vehicle is leased, of the lessee • in response to an official request of police or similar government office • as part of the manufacturer!s defense in case of legal proceedings • as required by law In addition, McLaren may use the collected or received diagnostic data: • for McLaren!s research needs ❧

♥

❼ ❻ ✘ 4

✛

♦

✏ ✏

✚ ✎

♥

.42

✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

..1.40

....1.35

...... 1.43

...... 1.38

...... 1.41

...... 1.45 ...... 1.44

...... 1.29

...... 1.43

...... 1.4

...... 1

......

③

⑥

①

④

❺

✉

☛

✔

✠

✒ ①

✥ ⑧

✡

✌

②

✳

❑

✟

⑩

✥

✠

☛

✥

✡

❋

③

✌

❑

✑

☛

◗

✳

✡

✔

✥

✍

③

✌

✡

⑦

③

✍

② ✦

✠

✥

✉

⑥

✡

✝ ⑥

✞

✒

✴

⑨

✥

✉

✔

❍

①

❺

✌

✠

❷

✡

✤

✌

✡

✇

✡

①

✔

❸

✟

✦

☛ ⑥

✌

✥

✇

✒

③

✟ ✡

❶

❏

⑥

❲ ❯ ❙ ❙ warningHazard lamps...... Hi headlamps...... beam Child passengers...... Daytime running lamps...... fogRear lamp...... Turn signals...... Parking lights...... Parking Exterior mirrors...... Light switch...... Light Supplementary Restraint System...... Restraint Supplementary Interior mirror ......

❳

⑦

✉

❶

❷

✉

⑨ ⑧

❷ ⑤

✏ ✘

✎

15 16

✗ ✗

✗

.. 1.10

...... 1.5

...... 1.8

...... 1.6

...... 1.9

...... 1.11 ...... 1.17

...... 1.18

...... 1.19

...... 1.14

...... 1.7

...... 1.26

⑤

...... 1.24 ...... 1.8

❸

⑨

...... 1.9

❷

...... 1.24

...... 1.12

❶

...... 1.

⑦

......

✉ ✌

......

...... ☛

...... ⑥

......

✡

①

......

✧

①

......

✌

✔

✓

③

❹

✤

⑩

✟

✍

✡

⑤

✡

①

✑

⑨

❋

①

③

✳

① ④

☛

③

✥

✇

✠

✧

✡

⑧

✡

✌

②

✌

✔

⑦

①

✔

✴

✍

✔

✟

✇

✟

✉

✠ ✴

✌

✓

✡

③

⑥ ✧

✈

✡

✠

☛

✉

☛

✦

①

✟

✡

✍

✟

① E

Locking and unlocking from inside...... and Locking Opening door a from inside...... Closing door...... a Racing seats...... Racing Individual settingsIndividual ...... Tow-away protection ...... Locking door a ...... Mislock ...... Automatic locking...... Interior motion sensor...... Luggage compartment...... Luggage Service Cover...... Electric seats...... Opening door...... a Immobilizer...... Manual seats...... Electric steering wheel adjustment steering Electric ...... Horn ...... ❙ ☞ ♣ ▼

①

B OPENINGAND CLOSING

③ ③ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➈ ❾ ➇ ➆ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➃ ➁ ➂ ➁ ➀ ❿ ❾ General ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✝ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✝ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✡ ☛ ☛ ✟ ✓ ✝ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✵ ✵ ❍ ❀ ❈ ❈ ✪ ✶ ✼ ✺ ✸ ✭ ✬ ✺ ✱ ➉ ✻ This device complies with Industry Canada by using the keyless entry feature, or by license-exempt RSS standard(s). pressing the appropriate button on the key Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio fob. transmitter may only operate using an The keyless entry feature requires the key to antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) be within 3 feet 11 inches (1.2 meters) of the gain approved for the transmitter by Industry sensors. Canada. ✡ ✑ ✗ ✌ ✌ ✦ ✠ ✒ ✟ ✧ ✔ ✒ ✡ ✝ ✑ ✥ ✍ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✝ ✥ ◆ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ For your convenience,❁ ❁ ➋ ➊ ❑ ❋ provided that the To reduce potential radio interference to Rules. Operation is subject to the following engine is not running, the car can be locked other users, the antenna type and its gain two conditions: irrespective of the electrical status, see should be so chosen that the equivalent Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2. 1. This device may not cause harmful isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not interference. more than that necessary for successful 2. This device must accept any communication. interference received, including This device complies with Industry Canada interference that may cause undesired licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is operation. subject to the following two conditions: (1) No changes shall be made to the equipment this device may not cause interference, and without the manufacturer!s permission as this (2) this device must accept any interference, may void the user!s authority to operate the including interference that may cause equipment. undesired operation of the device. This device complies with Part 2.1091 of the FCC Rules for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator and your body. ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Keyless entry Four sensors detect where the key fob✮ ✭ ✻ is✸ ✪ ❤ ✬ ✫ ✮ ✪ ➌ ✝ ✤ ✒ ☛ ✍ ✟ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✍ ✌ ✑ ✍ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✔ ❭ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✧ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✔ ✒ ✡ ✤ ✓ ✍ ✝ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ✵ ✴ ❋ ✴ around❋ the vehicle. disarm the vehicle by simply opening the key fobs. The key fob allows you to remotely door when the key fob is within 3 feet lock and unlock the vehicle. 11 inches (1.2 meters) of the sensors. The key NOTE: To prevent theft, only use the key fob needs only to be on the driver!s person or fob in the immediate vicinity of the in a non-metallic container such as a bag. It vehicle. does not need to be exposed or handled. The key fob locks and unlocks the following: • the doors (including fuel filler flap) • the luggage compartment • the center console stowage compartment

1. In vehicle sensor 2. Left-hand door sensor 3. Right-hand door sensor 4. Cup holder sensor ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

WARNING: The key fob allows the ❀ engine to be started and is also used ✬ ✼ ✸ ❥ ➍ Outcome to activate other features on the Button vehicle. If BOTH is selected, a single Take the key fob with you, every time press of the button unlocks you leave the vehicle. both doors. NOTE: Do not expose the key fob to high If DRIVER is selected, a levels of electromagnetic radiation. Single Press single press of the button Doing so may cause it to function unlocks the driver!s door. A incorrectly. For example close proximity second press (after a pause) to laptops, tablets, personal media unlocks the passenger!s players, or cell phones. door. If BOTH is selected, a ☛ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✓ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✡ ✡ ✒ ✠ ✦ ◆ ✝ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✓ ✒ ❚ ✳ ♠ ✵ ✴ ❑ ♠ ❍ ✵ double press of the button the unlock button. The front, rear and side unlocks both doors and turn signals (market specific) flash twice and unlatches the driver!s door. the anti-theft alarm system will be Double Press deactivated. If DRIVER is selected, a double press of the button The unlock button operation changes will unlock and unlatch the depending whether the DRIVER or BOTH is driver!s door only. selected in the vehicle settings, see Door Unlock, page 3.24. ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Opening a door Stowing the key fob NOTE: Because the door opens outwards ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✠ ✓ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✵ ✴ ♠ ✴ ➋ and then upwards, ensure sufficient side fob stays on your person when you are in the and overhead clearance before opening car. If, however, you wish to stow the key fob a door, see Vehicle dimensions, within the car, ensure that it is not left in plain page 6.7. view. 2. If keyless entry is used, the front, rear NOTE: If the message "key not found in and side turn signals (market specific) vehicle! appears on the instrument will flash twice, and the anti-theft alarm cluster, reposition key fob until it is system will be deactivated. detected. 3. The door latch will then release, allowing the door to be partially raised before it NOTE: Do not stow the key fob in the automatically swings outwards and center console stowage compartment, upwards. The mirrors will unfold if folded. in the cup holders, in the stowage nets ☛ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✓ ✔ ✗ ✔ ✡ ✠ between the seats, or on the shelf ❍ (1) firmly to unlock and NOTE: When the door is opened, the immediately behind the seats as the unlatch the door. window will lower slightly. It will raise to system may not detect its presence and NOTE: Ensure the key is within a 3 feet the closed position once the door is the engine will not start. 11 inches (1.2 meters) range of the door shut. If the window does not lower, for sensors when using the keyless entry example, due to a discharged battery or ❈ ❀ ❈ ✮ ✭ ❤ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✰ ✶ ❅ ✻ ✪ ✹ ✭ feature. freezing temperatures, take care when ✟ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✓ ✒ ✌ ✒ ✑ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✓ ✌ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ❑ ❏ ✳ ✴ opening and closing the door. Do not fully discharged battery, the vehicle can still WARNING: Always stand to the rear of force the door during opening or closing, be opened using the mechanical key, see the door before opening it, as the as this could lead to the door seals or Unlocking - discharged battery, page 5.24. opening action may cause injury. The window becoming damaged. speed that the door opens will be affected by ambient temperature. ❫ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Locking a door ➜ ➝ ➞ ➢ ➜ ➙ ↔ ➔ ➔ ➛ ➡ ➠ ➟ ➙ ➞ ➝ ➜ ➛ ➙ ↕ ↔ ➣ ➔ → ➔ ➓ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ on the unlock button will automatically lower the windows. The windows will continue to lower until the unlock button is released or the windows are fully lowered. NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked using the key fob but the doors or luggage compartment are not opened, the vehicle will relock after 30 seconds. ✠ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✡ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✔ ✒ ❙ ✒ ✟ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✗ ✒ ✍ ♠ ✳ ❁ ❁ 3. If using the keyless entry feature, pass page 1.9. your hand over the non-contact lock 2. To lock the vehicle using the key fob, sensor (1) on in the side pod. press the lock button. The front, rear and NOTE: Ensure the key is within a 3 feet side turn signals (market specific) flash in 11 inches (1.2 meters) range of the door a rapid, circular sequence around the sensors when using the keyless entry car. The anti-theft alarm system is feature. activated. NOTE: The lock sensor will recognize a single touch. ❢ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Mislock

➜ ➝ ➞ ➢ ➜ ➙ ↔ ➢ ➤ → ➞ ➣ ➟ ➙ ➞ ➝ ➜ ➛ ➙ ↕ ↔ ➣ ➔ → ➔ ➓ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ NOTE: The car can be locked/alarmed on the lock sensor will automatically with the luggage compartment open. A raise the window. The window will long tone sounds to alert you to this continue to raise until the lock sensor is condition, and differs to the short tone released or the window is fully closed. sounded for door open/key in car 4. The turn signals flash to indicate that the mislock. The luggage compartment will anti-theft alarm system is activated. become alarmed as soon as the luggage compartment lid is closed. This will allow NOTE: When the door is opened the door you to connect a McLaren supplied glass will lower slightly to avoid contact battery charger to the charging point in with other parts of the vehicle. When the the luggage compartment whilst leaving door is closed the glass will raise to the the rest of the vehicle locked. closed position automatically. If for any reason the door glass does not raise it is ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✧ ✍ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✠ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✦ ❄ likely that the system has ✳ sensed✳ ❑ ✳ ♠ a #trap$ event. This can be caused by debris in lid or the service cover are left open, or the the glass channel or misalignment of the key fob is still inside the vehicle, an audible glass. Ensure there are no obvious signs "mislock! signal will sound when an attempt to of debris in the glass channel, and hold lock the vehicle is made. the lock button. The glass will raise NOTE: If the doors are open or the key providing the door is correctly closed fob is still inside the vehicle, a and there are no obstructions momentary sounding of the alarm horn preventing it raising. If the glass does not will alert you. close, or the glass repeatedly fails to automatically raise, contact your Check that the doors, the luggage McLaren Retailer. compartment lid and the service cover are all closed, then relock the vehicle. ❦ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Individual settings Locking and unlocking from inside ☛ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✓ ✔ ✟ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✑ ✌ ◆ ✥ ✍ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✓ ➥ ✡ ✠ ✦ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ✳ ♠ ❑ ❋ ✴ ✴ you can change the locking system so that only the driver!s door is unlocked, see Auto Door Lock, page 3.23. If only the driver!s door has been configured to unlock, the passenger!s door can only be unlocked by either pulling the passenger!s door internal handle, pressing the unlock button on the key fob again or by unlocking the car from the central locking button on the center console. ✝ ✒ ✍ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✍ ☛ ✥ ✓ ✍ ✟ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✗ ✡ ✠ ✵ ✵ ❍ ✳ the vehicle, the light in the button will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle is locked. 2. Press the central locking button again to unlock the vehicle and the light in the button will be extinguished. ❧ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Opening a door from inside Closing a door ✤ ✒ ☛ ✟ ✤ ✠ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✠ ✒ ✟ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ➧ ✍ ✍ ✑ ✗ ✔ ✓ ✓ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✧ ✒ ✠ ✦ ☛ ✤ ✟ ✒ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✒ ✒ ✤ ☞ ❋ ❋ ❑ ❍ ❑ 1. Pull door handle upwards, in direction of at any time, even if it has been locked. Open arrow, and push the door outwards until ensure that it latches securely. the doors only if the vehicle is stationary and the opening mechanism takes over. The WARNING: Keep hands and other road and traffic conditions permit. door will then swing outwards and objects clear of the door edge when NOTE: Because the door opens outwards upwards automatically. closing. This is particularly important and then upwards, ensure sufficient side NOTE: When the door is opened, the for vehicles fitted with soft close and overhead clearance before opening window will lower slightly. It will raise to latches as the door will automatically a door. the closed position once the door is continue to the fully closed position shut. If the window does not lower, take when the first catch has engaged. care when opening and closing the door. There is no anti-trap feature Do not force the door during opening or preventing the door closing if an item closing, as this could lead to the door or body part is trapped between the seals or window becoming damaged. door and the door aperture, serious injury and vehicle damage may occur. If the window does not close, this may be due to an anti-trap event. Try one of the following: • reopen and close door • press lock button on key fob to request window close • lock vehicle using button on underside of door panel ➦ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Automatic locking ✝ ✒ ✍ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✧ ✍ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✵ ✳ ✳ ❑ ✳ automatically after the vehicle has driven away. NOTE: The doors unlock automatically in an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a predetermined level. The automatic locking function is selectable in the vehicle settings section of the instrument cluster, see Auto Door Lock, page 3.23. If automatic locking is ON, the interior central locking button will illuminate once the vehicle locks on drive away. ✔ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✌ ◆ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✓ ✒ ✓ ☛ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✦ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ❄ ♠ ➩ ❑ press the button (1) for a few seconds. The window will continue to raise until you remove your hand from the button. Only attempt this if the above methods do not resolve the problem. NOTE: Do not force the door closed, the door seals or window could be damaged. ➨ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Service Cover ➭ ➫ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✸ ✪ ❝ ✾ ● ❡ ❝ ❈ ❞ ❜ ➭ ❈ ❛ ➭ ❈ ❵ ❀ ✪ ✻ ❊ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✼ ❅ ✱ ✽ ✱ ✯ ✽ ✪ ✸ be very hot and there is a risk of severe burns. Only open the service cover from the side of the vehicle. WARNING: There is a risk of injury if the service cover is open, even when the engine is not running. Engine components become very hot and there is a risk of severe burns. The engine ignition system carries a high voltage. Never touch ignition system components; ignition coils, 1. Press the release button on the rear 2. From the side of the vehicle, lift the ignition wiring (spark plug edge of the driver!s door, the service service cover. The hinge will support the connections). cover will open slightly. cover in the raised position. WARNING: If the engine is stopped See Topping up the engine oil, page 5.3. due to the Eco Start-Stop System, the See Topping up the coolant, page 5.6. engine may restart without warning. ♥ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING

Luggage compartment ➯ ➯ ➲ Closing ➞ ➣ ➣ ➡ ➤ ➙ ↔ ➝ ➝ ➛ ➛ ➠ ↕ ➟ ↔ ➟ ➟ → ➝ ➛ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ NOTE: The luggage compartment is

❝ ✾ ● ❡ ❝ ❈ ❞ ❜ ➭ ❈ ❛ ➭ ❈ ❵ ❀ only open if the vehicle is stationary and ✪ ✻ ❊ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✼ ❅ ✱ ✽ ✯ ✱ ✽ ✪ ✸ located at the front of the vehicle. be very hot and there is a risk of neutral is selected. severe burns. Only close the service A message will display on the instrument cover from the side of the vehicle. cluster if the luggage compartment is Press the service cover down squarely from open when pulling away. the side of the vehicle and ensure that the ➭ ➫ cover latches securely. ✹ ✸ ✱ ✸ ✪

2. Alternatively, press the center console button to fully unlock and slightly open the luggage compartment. 3. Lift the front of the luggage compartment lid, the gas struts will support it in the fully open position. ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✓ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✍ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✗ ✡ ✠ ❍ ✳ ✳ ✳ key fob, the luggage compartment will fully unlock and open slightly. ✷ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ PENING A ND C LOSING ❈ ❈ ❈ ❃ ❈ ❀ ✿ ➭ ✿ Closing ✪ ✼ ✸ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✼ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✱ ✹ ✻ ✹ ✻ ✯ ✭ ✸ ✬ ✪ The button is located in the front luggage ❈ ❀ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ❤ ✪ ✸ ✸ ✬ ✬ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✯ ✽ ❊ ✸ ➳ button compartment area. The button is illuminated green when the car is awake and flashes when ❀ ❝ ✾ ➭ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ trapped as you close the luggage✸ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✰ ✼ ✪ ✱ ✽ ❅ ✱ ✯ ✲ ✽ ✭ ❊ ✸ ✪ ➍ compartment. could lock themselves in an open the vehicle is locked or shut down. This operation is completely independent of 1. Pull the luggage compartment lid down luggage compartment and risk injury. ignition state. There are 2 modes to the firmly and ensure that it is latched Children should be taught not to play button: securely. in or around the vehicle. 1. If the vehicle is in motion when the NOTE: Do not leave the key fob in the A mechanical luggage compartment internal button is pressed, the primary latch luggage compartment, as the vehicle release button is provided as a means of releases to allow air to enter the luggage may lock, and you may be locked out of escape for children and adults in the event compartment, but is prevented from the car. they become locked inside the luggage compartment. opening by the secondary latch. NOTE: If the vehicle had previously been 2. If the vehicle is stationary, both latches locked, it will still be locked and the turn will release to allow the occupant to exit signals will flash as the lid closes. the luggage compartment. 2. The luggage compartment will become alarmed as soon as the luggage compartment lid is closed. NOTE: The car can be locked/alarmed with the luggage compartment open. This will allow you to charge the battery while leaving the rest of the vehicle locked. A long tone sounds to alert you to this. ▲ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➵ NTI-THEFT S YSTEM ➾ ➀ ➸ ➈ ➽ ➈ ➸ ➼ ➀ ➻ ➸ ➺ ➂ ➸ ➁ ➄ Alarm system Immobilizer ✧ ✒ ✠ ✦ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✔ ✌ ✓ ☛ ✒ ✡ ✠ ◆ ✡ ✒ ✡ ★ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✍ ✥ ✧ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✓ ✔ ✥ ◆ ☞ ✴ ❑ ❍ ✳ ✳ ❍ alarm system is armed and any of the being started by an unauthorized person. following are opened: The vehicle is automatically immobilized • a door when it senses that there is no key fob • the service cover present in the vehicle. • the luggage compartment lid Remobilization occurs when a key fob is NOTE: The alarm remains triggered even sensed inside the vehicle. if you close the open aperture. To NOTE: Immobilization will only occur if silence the alarm, unlock the vehicle. the engine is not running The alarm system also incorporates the following features: • tow-away protection • interior motion sensor 2. The light in the central locking button will illuminate for approximately • center console stowage compartment 60 seconds after locking the vehicle NOTE: The center console stowage ❈ ❈ ❈ ✿ ✿ ✿ compartment must be closed for the ✪ ✽ ✱ ❅ ✻ ✶ ✭ ✼ ✪ ✹ ✻ ✭ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✮ ✽ interior motion sensor or the Auto Alarm ☛ ✡ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✝ ✑ ✥ ✓ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✍ ◆ ✝ ✡ ✒ ✗ ✍ ✑ ✌ ☛ ❪ ✳ ➚ ✵ ✴ ✵ to become armed. system or the key fob), the alarm will disarm and the light in central locking ❛ ❈ ❈ ✿ ✿ ✿ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✼ ✭ ✪ ✹ ✻ ✭ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✮ ✽ button will stop flashing. ☛ ✡ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✝ ✑ ✥ ✓ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✍ ◆ ✗ ✝ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✞ ✌ ✳ ➚ ✵ ✴ ✵ system or the key fob). The anti-theft alarm system will be armed after approximately 5 seconds. ❖ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➵ NTI-THEFT S YSTEM

Tow-away protection ✌ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✌ ◆ ✡ ✤ ✠ ✥ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✒ ✟ ✡ ❚ ✌ ✟ ✒ ✠ ❑ ✳ ➩ ❋ ❋ ❑ ✴ any attempt to steal the vehicle by suspended tow or by lifting onto a trailer. The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is raised or tilted in any way. Tow-away protection is armed approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle has been locked and is disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked. ❈ ➪ ❈ ❀ ❈ ➭ ❣ ✬ ❣ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✮ ✸ ✽ ✻ ✬ ✱ ✱ ✱ ✼ ✬ ✻ ✶ ❤ ✭ ✍ ✍ ✠ ✦ ✟ ✥ ✓ ✓ ✒ ☛ ✟ ✧ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✒ ✟ ✟ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✟ ✒ ✠ ✴ ✴ ➩ ❉ ❋ ❋ ❍ ❑ ✴ vehicle is being transported, e.g. loaded onto a ferry or vehicle transporter or your vehicle is parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split- 1. To disable tow-away protection, switch level garage. off the ignition, open the driver!s door and press the button on the rear edge of the driver!s door. The light in the switch will illuminate to indicate that tow-away protection has been disabled. NOTE: You cannot disable tow-away protection if the ignition is switched on. 2. Close the driver!s door and lock the vehicle (using the keyless system or the key fob). Tow-away protection remains disabled until you unlock the vehicle. ❫ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➵ NTI-THEFT S YSTEM

Interior motion sensor ✝ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✠ ✦ ✥ ✓ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✵ ✴ ✳ ✳ ✿ ❈ ✭ ✬ ✽ ✸ ✪ ✽ ✸ ✭ ✬ ✬ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✭ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✸ ✱ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✱ ✼ ✶ ❤ NOTE: You cannot disable the interior

✦ ✠ ✥ ✒ ✒ ✠ ✡ ✒ ✡ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✒ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ and movement is detected inside, e.g. if ❑ ❑ ❉ ❍ motion sensor if the ignition is switched someone breaks a window or reaches into the animals are to remain in the locked vehicle. on. vehicle through an open window. 2. Close the driver!s door and lock the The interior motion sensor is armed vehicle (using the keyless system or the approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle key fob). The interior motion sensor has been locked and is disarmed when the remains disabled until you unlock the vehicle is unlocked. vehicle. NOTE: To prevent false alarms close the windows when leaving the vehicle and do not hang anything on the interior mirror.

1. To disable the interior motion sensor, switch off the ignition, open the driver!s door and press the button on the rear edge of the driver!s door. The light in the switch will illuminate to indicate that the interior motion sensor has been disabled. ❢ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS ➈ ➸ ➄ ➀ ➈ Safety Manual seats ❈ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❂ ❈ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❛ ❝ ❞ ❜ ➹ ❛ ❵ ❣ ✭ ✪ ✯ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✬ ❣ ✸ ✭ ✽ ✫ ✭ ✰ ✼ ✻ ✰ ✸ ✭ ❅ ❊ ✻ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✯ e driver!s seat such that the driver can fully depress when the vehicle is stationary. You the pedals. The distance between the adjustment may not be able to observe road and driver!s chest and the center of the air traffic conditions and you could lose bag cover must be more than control of the vehicle as a result of 10 inches (25 centimeters). The the seat moving. You could therefore driver!s arms should be slightly bent cause an accident. when holding the steering wheel. WARNING: The seats can be moved • Vehicle occupants must always wear even without a key fob in the vehicle. their seat belt correctly. Do not leave children unattended in • Position the passenger!s seat as far the vehicle, they could be injured if a back as is comfortable. seat is moved accidentally. WARNING: McLaren Automotive does WARNING: Ensure that no one can not recommend the use of child seats become trapped as the seat moves. in this vehicle, but if you choose to do so, please follow the guidelines To reduce the risk of injuries in the below: ✤ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ✒ ✠ ✡ ✧ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✦ ✥ ✞ event of an accident, observe the ♠ following: • Children under 4 ft 5 in (1.35 meters) position and release the lever to lock the seat. tall or younger than 12 years of age • All vehicle occupants must select a WARNING: Ensure the seat is locked must be secured in a suitable child seat position that allows the seat belt in position before driving. restraint. to be worn correctly, but is as far • If you are using a child restraint on NOTE: Ensure that there are no items of away from the front air bags as luggage in the footwell or behind, possible. The position of the driver!s the passenger!s seat, move the seat as far back as possible. underneath or to the side of the seats. seat must allow the driver to drive the This may lead to the seats being vehicle safely. The distance from the damaged. driver!s seat to the pedals must be ❦ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS

Racing seats ➴ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❜ ❣ ✭ ✰ ✬ ✪ ✭ ➉ ✰ ✻ ✸ ✪ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❂ Manual seat backrest rake adjustment ✯ ✪ ✪ ✸ ✽ ❅ ✼ ✻ ight adjustment arward Adjustment ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ✿ ❵ ✫ ✬ ❥ ✽ ✱ ✭ ❊ ✪ ✬ ❅ ✻ ✱ ✪ ✸ ✱ ➘ ✱ injury, position the backrest as close as possible to vertical. NOTE: Do not recline the seat backrest so that it repeatedly contacts the rear bulkhead as this could lead to damage over time. ➱ ➮ ➬ ➷ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➣ ➜ ➔ ↔ → ➞ ➣ ↕ ➔ ➛ ➝ ➔ ➝ ➞ ➙ ➠ ➞ ➔ ➒ ↕ ➑ ➣ ➐ ➏ ➎ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✓ ✓ ✤ ✔ ✠ ✑ ☛ ✝ ✒ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ❋ ❑ ❋ reaches the desired height. forward and rearward position of the seat. NOTE: Height adjustment is only available on the driver!s seat. To adjust the seat, lift the lever and slide the seat to the desired position, ensuring you can comfortably reach all pedals and are able to move them through their full travel. Lift the lever, move the seat backrest to the WARNING: Ensure the seat is locked position required, and release the lever. in position before driving. ❧ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS

Electric seats ❀ ❀ ❈ ❈ ✿ ➹ ✪ ✼ ✱ ✭ ✪ ➳ ✻ ✽ ✻ ✻ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✸ ✯ ✪ ➯ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❈ ✿ ➹ ➛ ✃ ➣ ↕ ➞ ➞ ➔ ➙ ➛ ➡ ↔ ➛ ➡ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➣ ↔ ➢ ➣ ➛ ➡ → ➔ ➙ ➑ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ ❣ ✭ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✬ ❣ ✭ ✭ ➉ ✰ ✰ ✸ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✸ ✯ ✪ luggage in the footwell or adjacent to ✡ ✤ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✌ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✌ ✔ ✓ ❹ ✤ ✟ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ the seats as this may lead to the seats of the seat base and can be used when the being damaged or not getting full vehicle is in any awake status, see Vehicle adjustment. electrical status, page 2.2. ➴ ❈ ❈ ❐ ❡ ❛ ✿ ➹ ✪ ✻ ✰ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✹ ✻ ✱ ✼ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✸ ✯ ✪ NOTE: Ensure there are no items of luggage in the footwell or behind, ✌ ✝ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✌ ✒ ☛ ✝ ✡ ✧ ✌ ✔ ✓ ❹ ✤ ✟ ✌ ✍ ✥ ✌ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✒ ♠ ✳ ➋ your McLaren Retailer. beneath or to the side of the seats, or the seats may be damaged. WARNING: Seat height adjustment should only be carried out by your McLaren Retailer. ✔ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ❋ (1) until the seat reaches the desired position. ➦ ♥ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS ❈ ✿ ➹ ❀ ❀ ❈ Electric seat backrest rake adjustment ✻ ❅ ✻ ✻ ✰ ✹ ✪ ✽ ✱ ✼ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✪ ✯ ✪ ✪ ➳ ✻ ✽ ❅ ✻ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ✿ ❵ ✫ ✬ ❥ ✽ ✱ ✭ ❊ ✪ ✬ ❅ ✻ ✱ ✪ ✸ ✱ ➘ ✱ injury, position the backrest as close as possible to vertical. NOTE: When reclining the backrest, the seat base will automatically move forward, depending on its position relative to the rear bulkhead. If the seat base is moved backwards when the backrest is fully reclined, the backrest will automatically raise to prevent contact with the rear bulkhead. NOTE: Do not recline the seat backrest so that it repeatedly contacts the rear Press the switches (2) until the backrest is in bulkhead as this could lead to damage the required position. ✔ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ❋ (3) until the seat reaches over time. WARNING: Ensure there are no items the desired height. beneath the passenger!s seat or the occupant protection system may not function correctly. ➨ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS ✿ ❈ ✿ ➴ ➭ Electric seat lumbar adjustment ✹ ✸ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✪ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✮ ✱ ✬ ✭ ✻ ✽ ✬ ✬ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✤ ✠ ☛ ✒ ✟ ✠ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✌ ✝ ✥ ✦ ❙ ✥ ✝ ✡ ✳ ♠ ♠ ❏ ❑ wheel positions can be stored for up to two drivers. NOTE: Exterior mirror and steering wheel positions can only be stored or recalled using the driver!s memory buttons. NOTE: Steering wheel position can only be stored or recalled if electric steering column is fitted.

Set the seat, mirrors, and steering wheel to the desired positions; see Electric seats,

✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ (1) to raise or (2) to lower the position of the lumbar support. page 1.19, Electric steering wheel adjustment, page 1.24 and Exterior mirrors, Press (3) to inflate or (4) to deflate the lumbar page 1.38. support. Press and hold the memory set button (1) and then simultaneously press one of the memory position buttons (2) to store the setting. ♥ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS ● ✿ Recalling a memory position ✪ ✬ ✻ ✻ ✭ ✺ ✱ ✬ ✫ ❈ ❝ ❀ ✾ ❈ ➫ ❝ ❈ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ❵ ❈ ❀ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ✼ ✭ ✼ ❊ ✪ ✐ ✮ ✼ ✭ ✽ ✐ ✸ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✭ ✱ ✪ ✸ ✸ ✬ ✬ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✯ ✽ ❊ ✸ ➳ and steering wheel position, when the become trapped as the seat moves. vehicle is stationary. You may not be When comfort entry/exit is active, the driver!s able to observe road and traffic seat will move fully rearwards and to its lowest conditions this could lead to you position and the steering wheel will move losing control of the vehicle which inwards and to its highest position when the may result in an accident. engine is off and the driver!s door is opened. NOTE: Exterior mirror and steering wheel This assists exit from the vehicle. To switch positions can only be stored or recalled the feature on or off, see Comfort Entry/Exit, using the driver!s memory buttons. page 3.24. NOTE: Steering wheel position can only NOTE: Steering wheel will only change be stored or recalled if electric steering position if electric steering column is Press the button (2) where the required column is fitted. fitted. setting is stored, and hold until the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel have ✿ ✮ ✭ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✺ ✬ ✫ completed their adjustment. ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✠ ✓ ✌ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✓ ✡ ✍ ✒ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✦ ☞ ✴ ♠ ✳ driver!s seat and steering wheel to its most recent position using the control stalk on the left of the steering column. NOTE: Steering wheel will only change position if electric steering column is fitted. ✷ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ EATS ❐ ❈ ❈ ✟ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✟ ✍ ☛ ◆ ✡ ✒ ✟ ✑ ❚ ✍ ✡ ☛ ☛ ✒ ✒ ✥ ✍ ✌ ✍ ✥ ✝ ☛ ✓ ✦ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✪ ✽ ✽ ✻ ✪ ✰ ✪ ✻ ❍ ❋ ❒ ❍ ✴ ❋ 3. If the seat or steering wheel are ☛ ✟ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✡ ❩ Return Seat, Pull left Stalk or Press OK to manually adjusted ❍ before the stalk is accessed using the Clear$ is displayed on the left-hand display. used, the function will be lost and will not climate control screen on IRIS. See Heated The vehicle must be awake with ignition off, be available until the next time comfort seats, page 4.10. entry/exit function is used. the driver!s door closed, and comfort NOTE: The heated seat function is only entry/exit ON. NOTE: Cancel the comfort entry/exit available when the engine is running. function by starting the engine, or by 1. Pull the control stalk towards you once pressing a seat or steering column to initiate the comfort entry function. switch while the seat is returning to 2. If at any point you wish to cancel the position. function, operate the control stalk or open the driver!s door. A message #Seat 4. If the comfort entry/exit function is Returning, Operate Stalk or Open Door canceled, it will not be possible to return to Cancel$ will appear in the left-hand the seat and steering wheel to their display. previous positions using this function. The message in the left-hand display will NOTE: This function will only return the disappear and the control stalk will seat and steering wheel to the position return to its normal use. The function will they were in prior to the comfort be available when comfort entry/exit is entry/exit function being used. It will not next used. use any of the memory positions, unless the previous position was one of the 5. Once the seat and steering wheel have stored memory positions. returned to their previous positions, the message in the left-hand display will disappear and an audible alert will confirm that the process has been completed. ▲ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ TEERING W HEEL A ND S TEERING C OLUMN ➁ ➾ ➇ ❾ ➆ ➃ ➁ ➂ ❮ ➀ ➀ ➸ ➈ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➇ ➀ ➀ ➻ ❰ ➃ ➁ ➂ ❮ ➀ ➀ ➸ ➈ Manual steering wheel adjustment Electric steering wheel adjustment ❝ ✾ ➫ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❛ ➹ ❵ ❝ ✾ ➫ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❛ ➹ ❵ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✪ ❊ ✮ ❅ ✼ ✻ ✸ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✯ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✪ ❊ ✮ ❅ ✼ ✻ ✸ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✯ • your arms are slightly bent when you wheel position when the vehicle is hold the wheel wheel position when the vehicle is stationary. You may not be able to • you can move your legs freely stationary. You may not be able to observe road and traffic conditions observe road and traffic conditions • you can see all the displays in the this could lead to you losing control this could lead to you losing control instrument cluster clearly of the vehicle which may result in an of the vehicle which may result in an accident. Pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel. accident. Ensure the lever is locked before driving. The steering wheel can be adjusted for height The steering wheel position may be adjusted and reach. for height and reach using the column control switch when the vehicle is in any awake status, see Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2. The column control switch is located on the left-hand side of the steering column.

Push the lever (highlighted) downwards and position the steering wheel so that: ❖ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ TEERING W HEEL A ND S TEERING C OLUMN ● ✿ NOTE: The column control switch will✪ ✻ ✱ ✮ ✭ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✺ ✬ ✫ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✑ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✟ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✥ ➧ ☛ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✧ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ ♠ ✴ only❏ adjust the steering wheel in one direction at a time. steering wheel and column will move fully Using the column control switch, position the inwards (away from the driver) and to its steering wheel so that: highest position when the engine is off and the driver!s door is opened. • your arms are slightly bent when you hold the wheel You can return the steering wheel and column to its most recent position using the • you can move your legs freely control stalk on the left of the steering • you can see all the displays in the column. See Comfort exit, page 1.22. instrument cluster clearly WARNING: Ensure that your hands ❈ ✿ ➹ ❈ ❀ ❛ ✿ ✼ ✪ ✻ ✻ ✰ ✪ ✽ ✸ ❅ ✯ ✪ ❣ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✪ ✱ ✪ ✬ ✻ ✻ ✻ ✽ ✯ are kept clear of the wheel and ✔ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✤ ✡ ✥ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✌ ➥ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✠ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ♠ ❑ ❑ ❋ ✴ column as the steering wheel moves. ✡ ✗ ✕ ✥ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✟ ❩ ✳ ❘ the electric steering wheel position is stored NOTE: Any automatic movement can be 2. Height: Lower when the seat and mirror positions are stored. canceled with any input from the 3. Reach: Away See Storing a memory position, page 1.21. column control switch. 4. Reach: Towards WARNING: Ensure that your hands Moving the column control switch in are kept clear of the wheel and directions 1 & 2 adjusts the steering wheel column as the steering wheel moves. height, raising or lowering the wheel!s NOTE: Any automatic movement can be position. canceled with any input from the Moving the column control switch in column control switch. directions 3 & 4 adjusts the steering wheel reach, moving it closer or further away. ❫ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

➶ TEERING W HEEL A ND S TEERING C OLUMN

Horn ✒ ✌ ✍ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ❋ ✳ operate the horn. NOTE: The horn can be operated when the ignition is switched off. ❢ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY ➽ ➸ ➀ ➼ ➄ ➈ ➸ ➁ ➄ ❿ ➆ ➆ ❾ Seat belts ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✤ ✍ ✥ ✑ ✝ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✍ ✡ ✡ ❙ ✴ ❍ Do not secure any objects with a seat the shoulder belt between the breasts most effective means of restraining vehicle belt if the seat belt is being used by a and to the side of the abdomen. occupants from impact forces, which vehicle occupant. Ensure the belt is not slack or twisted. minimizes the danger of injury from interior Avoid wearing bulky clothing. WARNING: The seat belt only provides impacts and the effects of whiplash. Do not route the belt across sharp its intended degree of protection if WARNING: A seat belt which is not edged or fragile objects especially if the seat backrest is positioned close worn, worn incorrectly, or has not these are on or in your clothing The to vertical, and the occupant is sitting been engaged fully in the seat belt seat belt could be damaged and you upright. buckle, cannot perform its intended could be injured. WARNING: The seat belt cannot function. To avoid injuries, ensure perform its function correctly if the that all vehicle occupants wear their Only one person should use each seat seat belt or buckle becomes seat belt correctly at all times. belt at any one time. excessively dirty or damaged. Ensure Ensure that the belt: Never allow children to travel on the the belt latch engages the buckle lap of another occupant. • is routed as low as possible across fully. your pelvic area, i.e. across your hip Children under 4 ft 5 in (1.35 meters) Check the seat belts regularly to joints and not across your abdomen tall or younger than 12 years of age ensure that they are not damaged, or • fits closely must be secured in a suitable child routed over sharp edges and are not restraint. Follow the manufacturer!s • is not twisted trapped. The belt could tear in an instructions when installing child accident, causing injury to occupants. • is routed across the middle of your restraint systems. shoulder Have seat belts checked if the belts WARNING: Pregnant women should • lies flat across the mid point of the have been damaged or subjected to a wear a seat belt to ensure maximum heavy load. Work on the seat belts collar bone between the neck and safety of mother and unborn child. shoulder should only be carried out by your Position the lap belt across the hips, McLaren Retailer. • fits closely across your pelvis by beneath the abdomen and position pulling the shoulder belt upwards ❦ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY

Wearing a seat belt 3. With the belt correctly positioned insert The belt tensioner will be triggered for each the latch into the buckle and press until seat belt, provided the belt latch is engaged in a click is heard to confirm engagement. the seat belt buckle, if a head-on or rear-end Check engagement by attempting to collision occurs and the vehicle decelerates pull the latch from the buckle. or accelerates rapidly. If the belt tensioners are triggered, a bang will ➴ ❈ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✽ ✸ ✪ ✻ ✻ ✼ ✪ ✪ ❤ ✻ be heard, a small amount of dust may be ✔ ✠ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✍ ✟ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✒ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✍ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❑ ❍ released and the Supplementary Restraint Belt tensioners apply tension to the seat belts System warning light will illuminate. in an accident, pulling them tight against the occupant. WARNING: Once triggered (or if you are unsure if they have triggered) you WARNING: Do not insert the belt latch MUST not drive the vehicle. Contact into the passenger!s seat belt buckle your nearest McLaren Retailer if the passenger!s seat is unoccupied. immediately. The belt tensioners could be triggered ✟ ✌ ✠ ✍ ✒ ✦ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✗ ✔ ☛ ❳ ❍ ✴ ✴ ✿ ❀ in an accident. ✽ ✱ ✭ ✭ ✼ ✪ ✬ ✻ ✪ ✫ ✱ ✻ ✼ ✪ ✩ and the controls are within easy reach. ✔ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✧ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✝ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✍ ✟ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✒ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✍ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ❚ WARNING:❍ ❑ Belt❍ tensioners do not 2. Grasp the seat belt latch and pull across correct an incorrect seating position Belt force limiters are tuned to the front air the body, ensuring that the belt lies flat or incorrectly worn seat belts. bags and gradually release the tension being across the mid point of the collar bone applied to the belts during an impact, Belt tensioners do not pull occupants between the neck and shoulder, then reducing the force exerted on occupants. across the chest and pelvis. back towards the backrests. ❧ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY

Supplementary Restraint System ✿ ❛ ❈ Seat belt warning light ✪ ✻ ✽ ✮ ❤ ✽ ✭ ✱ ✹ WARNING: Air bags are not a ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✍ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✍ ✌ ✔ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ✳ ❋ ✳ substitute for correctly worn seat ✒ ✍ ✍ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✤ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✌ ➥ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ❋ ✳ ❑ ❑ ❋ instrument cluster and a warning tone air bags: belts, they enhance the level of reminds vehicle occupants to fasten their occupant protection offered by seat • driver!s front air bag in the steering seat belts. The seat belt warning light belts. wheel extinguishes and the warning tone ceases when the driver and passenger have fastened • passenger!s front air bag in the their seat belt. dashboard • driver!s and passenger!s knee air bags • side head air bags in the doors

WARNING: Correct operation of the air bags can only occur if the steering wheel, the passenger!s air bag cover, the knee air bag cover and the door trim are not covered. WARNING: Take note of all warning labels attached to the sun visors. ➦ ✷ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY ❈ ❀ ✿ ✿ ❛ ❈ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✫ ✱ ✰ ✪ ✻ ✬ ✽ ✮ ❤ ✽ ✭ ✱ ✹ ✫ ✬ ❥ ✽ ✱ ✭ ✪ ❅ ✯ ✻ ✰ ✪ ✪ ❊ ✭ ✬ • Because of the high speed at which ✠ ✥ ✟ ✟ ✦ ✡ ✥ ✧ ✑ ✤ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✒ ✔ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✝ ✡ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✦ ❄ injuries in the event of an accident,❍ ✳ ✴ ✴ ✴ air bags deploy, there is a risk of observe the following points: injuries caused by an inflating air bag. to accommodate a person with disabilities, • Ensure that the driver!s chest is at please contact McLaren Automotive Inc at: ❛ ➭ ❈ ❀ ❈ ✿ ✪ ❤ ✭ ✭ ✱ ✼ ✹ ✪ ✻ ✸ ✪ least 10 inches (25 centimeters) from McLaren Automotive Inc. the air bag cover. 750 3rd Avenue, Suite 2400 • Do not lean forward over the dashboard while the vehicle is in New York motion. NY 10017 • Do not rest your feet on the dashboard. • Only hold the steering wheel by the outside of the rim. You could be injured if the air bag deploys and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. • Occupants, particularly children, must not lean on the doors from ❈ ❈ ❀ ✿ ❈ ❈ ✿ ❃ ❀ ❂ inside the vehicle. ❅ ✻ ✽ ✻ ✪ ❤ ✭ ✰ ✽ ✭ ✱ ✬ ✸ ✸ ✹ ✪ ✪ ✭ are replaced every 15 years to • Ensure that there are no other prevent air bags from not firing due to objects between the vehicle component operating life. occupants and the deployment area of the air bags. ➨ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY

Front air bags console is NOT illuminated, see Occupant classification system - front passenger!s seat, page 1.32. ❈ ➴ ❈ ❈ ✪ ❅ ✰ ✪ ❤ ✰ ✽ ✭ ✱ ✱ ✹ ➹ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✮ ✸ ✭ ✱ ✫ ✯ ✬ ❥ ✽ ✱ ✭ ✪ ❅ ✯ ✻ ✰ ✪ ✪ ❊ ✭ ✬ to occupants if a side head air bag is triggered, ensure that: • there are no other objects between the vehicle occupants and the deployment area of the air bags • no accessories are attached to the doors • no heavy or sharp objects are left in The side head air bags (left-hand highlighted) the pockets in clothing are located in the upper area of each door ✠ ✥ ✟ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✔ ❨ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ✳ (1) deploys in front of • the steering wheel and the passenger!s front occupants, particularly children, panel, and are deployed if the system air bag (2) deploys in front of and above the must not lean on the doors from determines they can offer additional dashboard. inside the vehicle protection for the head of the occupant on the side of the vehicle on which the impact The front air bags are deployed if the system occurs. determines they can offer additional protection for occupants against head and NOTE: The passenger!s side head air bag chest injuries. is only deployed if the passenger!s seat is occupied. NOTE: The passenger!s front air bag is only triggered if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light on the overhead ♥ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY

Knee air bags offer additional protection for the knees and ➹ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✮ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✫ ✯ ✬ ❥ ✽ ✱ ✭ ✪ ❅ ✯ ✻ ✰ ✪ ✪ ❊ ✭ ✬ lower body of the occupant on the side of the to occupants if a knee air bag is vehicle on which the impact occurs. triggered, ensure that: NOTE: The passenger!s knee air bag is • there are no other objects between only deployed if the passenger!s seat is the vehicle occupants and the occupied. deployment area of the air bags ➪ ✿ ❀ ❈ ❀ ❈ ❀ ❀ ➭ ➫ ❈ • no heavy or sharp objects are✻ ✸ left✬ ✭ ✫ ✪ ✻ in✽ ✮ ✽ ✸ ✬ ✻ ✯ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✸ ✫ ✱ ✼ ✽ ✽ passenger!s seat the pockets in clothing ☛ ✔ ❨ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✥ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✑ ❚ ✳ ❑ ✴ seat is occupied using weight sensors or a capacitance mat fitted in the seat base, and by checking the seat belt buckle engagement on the passenger!s seat belt. The passenger!s The status of the air bags is indicated by the front air bag will not be active unless a specific PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light on the weight is exceeded. This allows child restraint overhead console. systems to be used on the passenger!s seat. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes after 5 seconds. The warning light will remain illuminated if the passenger!s seat is unoccupied or if a child seat is fitted. The knee air bags (highlighted) are located in NOTE: The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF the lower area of the dash board, and are warning light is always illuminated unless deployed if the system determines they can the specific weight is exceeded. ✷ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY ❲ ❳ ❙ ❳ ❙ ❄ ☞ ☞ ☛ ☞ ✥ ❬ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✠ ✍ ✌ ◗ ✑ ✟ ✌ ✑ ✦ ❄ ♣ ❘ ❘ ♣ ✳ ❋ ✳ ➋ ➋ aftermarket equipment such as WARNING: Do not place sharp objects is illuminated, the passenger!s front air bag is covers, heaters, and massagers are onto the passenger!s seat. These may not active. The side head air bag and the belt NOT used. damage the occupant classification tensioner on the passenger!s side remain WARNING: Any electronic devices system if they puncture the seat active even if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF that are either active or connected to cushion. warning light is illuminated. the 12V accessory socket should not WARNING: To ensure that the WARNING: If the PASSENGER AIR BAG be placed on the passenger!s seat. occupant classification system OFF warning light is not illuminated They can affect how the occupant functions correctly, never place when the child seat is fitted, the classification system operates. objects (e.g. a cushion) under the passenger!s air bag is not WARNING: The occupant child restraint system. The entire deactivated. The child could be classification system may become base of the child restraint system seriously injured if the passenger!s affected if any form of liquid must be in contact with the seat at all air bag inflates. (inclusive of rain) is spilled onto the times. If a child restraint system is WARNING: To ensure that the passenger!s seat. If the PASSENGER not fitted correctly it may not provide occupant classification system AIR BAG OFF warning light is not the intended degree of protection in functions correctly, McLaren illuminated when the seat is the event of an accident and may recommends that objects are not unoccupied, do not install a child cause injuries. placed under a seat. McLaren also restraint or allow anyone to occupy ❛ ➭ ✿ ❈ recommends that additional the seat. Please contact your nearest ✪ ❤ ✮ ✻ ✰ ✭ ✬ ✱ ✼ ✸ ✹ ✪ ✠ ✥ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✍ ✒ ✝ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ❄ materials are not applied such as a ❍ ✳ McLaren Retailer at your earliest deployed by the Supplementary Restraints blanket, cushion, or aftermarket convenience. System to protect the vehicle occupants. The equipment such as a seat cover, system can control the number of air bags heater, or massager. These items can deployed and partially or fully inflate the seriously affect how well the occupant classification system operates. McLaren recommends that ▲ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY ➴ ➭ ➭ ✿ ❈ ✿ ❈ ➴ ❜ ❈ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✦ ✠ ✒ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✤ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✔ ✯ ✪ ✼ ✻ ✪ ✭ ✮ ✻ ✸ ✻ ✻ ✭ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✹ ✽ ✱ ✮ ✪ ❣ ✸ ✱ ✸ ✭ ✴ ❍ ✳ ❑ ✳ WARNING: If the air bags are collision to provide the best possible deployed, a bang will be heard and a light ✧ ❙ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✡ ✍ ❙ ✡ ✑ ❚ protection to the vehicle occupants. small amount of fine powder may✴ be❘ ✴ ❑ ❑ The system uses sensors to rapidly evaluate released. The noise will not damage performs a self-test at regular intervals the collision severity, the number of vehicle your hearing and the powder does not when the ignition is switched on and the occupants, each occupant!s weight, their constitute a health hazard nor does it engine is running. imply that a fire has broken out. This physical size and their seated position in The warning light in the instrument cluster powder could cause short term relation to their air bags. Once all these illuminates when the ignition is switched on breathing difficulties for persons factors are known the system will then deploy and extinguishes 5 seconds after the engine suffering from asthma or other the necessary air bags and regulate the is started. inflation pressure in the impact zone to respiratory conditions. To prevent WARNING: Contact your McLaren ensure the occupant!s safety. breathing difficulties, leave the vehicle as soon as possible or open a retailer immediately should any of After an accident the air bags begin to window. the following occur: depressurise almost immediately after the • the warning light does not illuminate inflation process has taken place. The gas WARNING: After an air bag has been when you switch on the ignition used to inflate the air bags escapes through triggered, air bag parts are hot, do not • vents in the air bag and this helps reduce the touch them. Have the air bags the light does not extinguish occurrence of major impact injuries to the replaced at your McLaren Retailer. 5 seconds after the engine is running occupants. • the light illuminates again, after the ➫ ➫ ➫ ➫ ✸ ✻ ✬ ✯ ✱ ✻ ✫ ✱ ✽ ✬ engine has started ✔ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✡ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ✠ ▼ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✠ ✥ ✟ ✓ ✡ ✒ ✧ ✑ ✔ ✡ ❚ ✌ ✔ An air bag❍ slows down❍ ✴ ✳ and✴ restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant reducing tested for the correct small child Out Of the load on the body, but is not a substitute Position (OOP) operation. OOP can occur if a for a correctly worn seat belt. small child is incorrectly positioned in the passenger!s seat in the event of a collision in which the air bags are deployed. ❖ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY

Child passengers ❈ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✸ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✼ ✪ ✰ ✻ ✼ ✲ ✱ ✬ ❅ ✸ ❊ ✬ ✶ ✿ ❈ Safety features ✪ ✻ ✽ ✮ ✽ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✼ ✱ ❅ ✺ ✤ ✡ ◆ ✍ ✒ ◆ ✒ ✓ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✒ ✑ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✓ ✌ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✒ ☛ ✔ ✡ ✒ ✤ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✌ ✒ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ☞ unsupervised☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ in the vehicle even if ✳ ❍ ✴ in an accident the following events will occur they are secured in a child restraint. the use of child seats in this vehicle, but if you to assist you and any recovery personnel: Children could injure themselves on choose to do so, please follow the guidelines parts of the vehicle, open a door and • the doors will unlock below: be seriously or even fatally harmed by Secure any child under 4 feet 5 inches • the hazard warning lights will switch on prolonged exposure to heat or cold. • the interior lighting will switch on (1.35 meters) tall or younger than 12 years of If children open a door, they could age traveling in the vehicle in an appropriate In some instances, the fuel system will also be cause injury to others in doing so or category restraint according to their weight. switched off. get out of the vehicle and possibly Contact your McLaren Retailer for advice. injure themselves or they could be injured by a passing vehicle. ✡ ✌ ✠ ✟ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✑ ❯ ❁ ✳ ✴ ✳ Do not expose the child restraint Category 0 Up to 22 lb (10 kg) system to direct sunlight. The metal parts of the child restraint system Category 0+s Up to 28 lb (13 kg) could burn the child. Category I 20 to 40 lb (9 to 18 kg) Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle unless they are Category II 34 to 55 lb (15 to 25 kg) secured. Category III 48 to 80 lb (22 to 36 kg) An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load increases the risk of Please refer to current national and state laws injury to the child during sharp for specific requirements. braking, a sudden change of direction or an accident. ❫ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY

is fully rearwards and is positioned at the lowest height. A manual passenger!s seat does not have height adjustment. WARNING: If the child restraint system has not been fitted correctly, the child cannot be restrained in an accident or sudden braking and could be injured. When fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer!s instructions on the correct use of the child restraint. ❀ ❈ ❀ ✾ ➴ ✾ ✸ ✸ ✬ ✯ ✱ ✫ ✻ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✼ ✱ ❅ ➌ ❀ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❈ ❝ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✽ ✯ ✭ ✪ ✭ ✪ ❊ ❣ ✲ ✭ ✰ ✪ ✭ WARNING: If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ❄ ✔ ❙ ❄ ❭ ✤ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ facing child restraint system✴ on❋ the OFF indicator does not illuminate, do which is an automatic locking seat belt on the passenger!s seat if the passenger!s not use a rearward facing child passenger!s side designed to temporarily lock front air bag is active. The status is restraint system on the passenger the seat belt to securely hold the child indicated by the PASSENGER AIR BAG seat. You may use a forward-facing restraint in the passenger!s seat. OFF indicator. child restraint system on the passenger!s seat. The warning label 1. Extend the passenger!s seat belt fully. on the passenger!s side is there to The KISI system only engages when the remind you of this. seat belt is fully extended. WARNING: If a forward facing child NOTE: If the vehicle is parked on a hill the seat is fitted to the passenger!s seat, inertia lock may stop the seat belt make sure that the passenger!s seat extending. If this occurs, release the seat ❢ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

❽ CCUPANT S AFETY ❈ ➭ ❈ ❀ ❈ ❡ ➬ ➮ ✽ ✭ ✸ ✪ ✭ ✬ ✻ ✹ ❅ ✽ ✭ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✪ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➜ ➙ ➛ ➣ ➛ ➞ ➣ ➛ → ➙ ↕ ➣ ➙ ➞ ➤ ➜ ➝ ➣ ➙ ➢ ↔ ➟ ↕ ➝ ➔ ➣ ➝ ➛ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ seat✭ ✻ ✻ ✸ ✽ ✽ ✱ belt✭ ✸ ✪ ✪ ✬ ✭ ✹ ❅ ✰ ✼ carefully✱ ❊ ❅ ✺ to avoid the engagement of the inertia lock. are designed to withstand only those 2. Pass the seat belt through the child loads imposed by correctly fitted restraint as described by the child child restraints. Under no restraint manufacturer and engage the circumstances are they to be used for belt latch in the buckle. adult seat belts, harnesses or for 3. Adjust the belt so that the lower section attaching other items or equipment is tight against the restraint and allow to the vehicle. the upper section to retract. The KISI WARNING: When fitting a child system will click as the belt retracts. restraint, always pass the upper 4. When the seat belt has retracted as far as tether strap over the top of the seat possible, pull on the upper section to back. check that the seat belt has locked. Always ensure that if an upper tether An upper tether anchorage is provided on the NOTE: The KISI system will disengage is provided, it is secured and passenger!s seat. when the seat belt has fully retracted tightened fully, as this provides Install the child seat and pass the upper tether and can then be worn as a normal seat maximum protection for a child. strap over the top of the seat back, secure it belt. Once the KISI system has unlocked, to the anchorage and tighten fully. it will be necessary to fully extend the Once the child restraint is installed, test the seat belt to engage the KISI system the security of the installation, before seating a next time a child restraint is used. child. Attempt to twist the child seat from side to side and to pull it away from the vehicle seat, to check it is securely in place. ❦ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IRRORS ➈ ❮ ❾ ❮ ❮ ➂ ➾ Safety Interior mirror Exterior mirrors ❝ ✾ ✿ ✾ ❝ ❈ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ❵ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✐ ✬ ✽ ✻ ✽ ❊ ✪ ✸ ❥ ✪ ✭ ✭ ✰ ✪ ✭ ✬ ✫ ❊ ✪ ✩ iving, adjust all mirrors to give the best possible view exterior mirrors have convex glass of road and traffic conditions. fitted. This type of mirror enlarges the field of vision, but reduces the size of the image. This means that objects are closer than they appear. To avoid misjudging the distance to vehicles traveling behind and perhaps causing an accident, check the actual distance of the vehicle, before changing direction. The exterior mirrors control is located on the dashboard between the steering wheel and ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✓ ✧ ✦ ✧ ✥ ✤ ✝ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ the center console. interior mirror is activated or deactivated by pressing the switch (2) on the bottom of the mirror. The indicator light (1) will illuminate when automatic dimming is active. When activated, the interior mirror will automatically dim when bright light is detected by the light sensor (3) . If reverse gear is selected or if ambient light levels are high, the automatic dimming function will be deactivated. ❧ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IRRORS ➭ ➭ ❂ ✿ ● ✪ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✲ ✪ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✱ ✰ ✭ ✬ ✭ ✭ ✱ Adjusting mirrors ✰ ✼ ✬ ✫ ✭ ✭ ✬ ✬ ✱ ✭ ➳ ✭ ✭ ✱ ✪ ✻ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✤ ✒ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✠ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❑ ❍ ❏ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✡ ☛ ✗ ✑ ✌ ❙ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✥ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✡ ☛ ✗ ✑ ✌ ❙ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✥ ✳ ❋ ✳ ❋ 2. Rotate the control to position (3) to fold reverse is engaged. This provides a view of the the mirrors. ground to the rear of the vehicle. See Reverse Mirror Dip, page 3.24. 3. To unfold the mirrors rotate the control away from position (3) . ❐ ❈ ✿ ✽ ✪ ✰ ✭ ✪ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✭ ✱ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✠ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✥ ❳ ✠ ✡ ✌ NOTE:❋ If the❋ switch remains in position❏ (3) the mirrors will be folded until the pressed on the IRIS screen and the engine is switch is moved. running. see Heated mirror, page 4.11. They are also heated when the ambient ❈ ❀ ❈ ✿ ✿ ● ✰ ✱ ✼ ✭ ✭ ✬ ✻ ✬ ✻ ✬ ✬ ✫ ✱ ✭ ➳ ✯ ✭ ✭ ✱ ✪ ✻ temperature is below 41°F (5°C). ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✠ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✑ ❚ ✴ ❍ ❏ fold automatically when the vehicle is locked. Unfolding occurs as a door is opened, not when the vehicle is unlocked. See Auto Fold Mirrors, page 3.23. 2. Rotate the control to the left (1) to adjust the left-hand mirror or to the right (2) to adjust the right-hand mirror. 3. Move the control up, down left and right to adjust the mirror to the desired position. ➦ ▲ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IGHTING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➸ ➻ ➃ ➂ ➇ Exterior lighting ✧ ✟ ✍ ✧ ✥ ✤ ✗ ✟ ✑ ✟ ✡ ✡ ❩ ❑ ❍ 1. License plate lamp 2. Headlamp lo beam 2. Stop lamp/Tail lamp/Turn signal 3. Turn signal/Daytime running 3. Central high mounted stop lamp lamp/Sidelamp 4. Side marker lamp 4. Side turn signal 5. Reflector 5. Side marker lamp 6. Reverse lamp and rear fog lamp ➨ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IGHTING

Light switch ❀ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✸ ✻ ✬ ✱ ❅ ❣ ✽ ✻ ✬ ✸ ✬ ✰ ✽ ✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ ✼ ❊ ✪ ❅ Rotate the control to position (A) for off, the lo beam headlamps will also automatically in foggy conditions. automatic light control. switch off dependent on ambient light Automatic light control is only an aid, Rotate the control to position (1) for conditions. you are responsible for the vehicle!s sidelamps or position (2) for headlamps. The lighting at all times. sidelamp warning light illuminates in the The light switch is located between the instrument cluster. steering wheel and the driver!s door and has ❈ ❀ ❀ ❛ ✿ the following positions. ✼ ✬ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✸ ❅ ✱ ✬ ✬ ✻ ✹ ✻ ✱ ✼ ✯ ✡ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✒ ✍ ✧ ✟ ✤ ✧ ✡ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✤ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ❍ ❑ switched on automatically when ambient light falls below a predetermined level. To switch on automatic light control, turn the light switch to position (A) . NOTE: If the vehicle detects rain whilst the light switch is set to position (A) the lo beam headlamps will switch on automatically, regardless of current external light levels. NOTE: With the light switch in position (A) and the fog lights switched on, the lo beam headlamps will also switch on irrespective of ambient light conditions. At position (0) , the lights are off with the When the rear fog lamps are switched exception of daytime running lamps and tail lamps. ♥ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IGHTING

Hi beam headlamps ❐ ➭ ❈ ✿ ❈ ❈ Sidelamps ✼ ❅ ✪ ✫ ✽ ✼ ✰ ☛ ✥ ☛ ☛ ✓ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✧ ✤ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✧ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✤ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✍ ✍ ✍ ✔ ✒ ✟ ✓ ✌ ✓ ✤ ✌ ✦ ✠ ✔ ✒ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✓ ✳ ✴ ❑ ✴ ✵ ✴ ❋ lamps are a combined series of Light Emitting The hi beam headlamps operate for as long as Diodes located around the outside of the the stalk is held. headlamp. The sidelamps operate at a lower intensity than the daytime running lamps, see The hi beam headlamps warning light Daytime running lamps, page 1.43. illuminates in the instrument cluster. The sidelamps, tail lamps and license plate lamps illuminate when the light switch is turned to position (1) . The sidelamps warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates. ➭ ✿ ❈ ❃ ✿ ❈ ❈ ✪ ✽ ✪ ❤ ✼ ❅ ✬ ✰ ✍ ✟ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✌ ✑ ✔ ✔ ✓ ✧ ✥ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✒ ✌ ✥ ❚ ✵ ❋ ✴ ❑ ♠ ❍ ❋ ✥ ✌ ✍ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✧ ✌ ✟ ✍ ☛ ✤ ✠ ✔ ✟ ✓ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✒ ✌ ✥ ❚ ✳ ❑ ♠ ❋ from you. switch to (2) . The hi beam headlamps warning light NOTE: On your McLaren, the same illuminates in the instrument cluster. headlight lo beam setting applies for Pull the stalk towards you, to revert to lo driving on either the left-hand or beams. right-hand side of the road. ✷ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IGHTING

Daytime running lamps Rear fog lamp ☛ ✥ ☛ ☛ ✓ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✧ ✤ ✤ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ➬ ➯ ✳ ✴ ❋ ➔ ➛ ➣ ↔ ➡ ➛ ➝ ➠ ↔ ➙ ➝ ➞ ➞ ➟ ➠ ➞ ✃ ➡ ↔ ➛ ➡ ➛ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ NOTE: With the light switch in position lamps which, along with the tail lights, when lo beam headlamps are on. (A) and the rear fog lights switched on, illuminate automatically when the ignition is Ensure that the lo beam headlamps are the lo beam headlamps will also switch switched on even if all lights are switched off. switched on or the light switch is in position on irrespective of ambient light The sidelamps and the daytime running (A) . conditions. When the rear fog lamps are lamps are a combined series of Light Emitting switched off, the lo beam headlamps will Diodes located around the outside of the lo also switch off dependent on ambient beam headlamp. The daytime running lamps light conditions. operate at a higher intensity than the sidelamps.

Press the fog light button in the center of the light switch. The warning light in the instrument cluster and the light in the switch both illuminate. ▲ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IGHTING

Turn signals Hazard warning lamps ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✥ ☛ ✡ ◆ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✠ ✧ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✍ ✒ ★ ✟ ✟ ✟ ✠ ✔ ✑ ✡ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ ❋ ❑ ❑ ❈ ➪ ❈ ❡ ❀ ❈ ✸ ✹ ✱ ✽ ✼ ✽ ✸ ✼ ✪ ✭ ✸ ✯ ❅ ✪ ✹ ✸

✍ ✥ ✌ ✍ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✓ ✔ ✧ ✥ ✟ ✑ ✡ ➧ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✔ ☛ ☛ ✠ ✓ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ✒ ▼ ignition is switched off. As a safety feature, ✵ ❍ ✳ resistance is felt when changing lanes on a they switch on automatically when an air bag motorway. The appropriate turn signal flashes is triggered. three times. ➭ ✿ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❈ ➭ ❈ ➫ ✽ ✼ ❅ ✹ ✪ ✸ ❣ ➘ ✱ ❅ ✻ ✰ ✸ ✭ ✭ ✹ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✪ ✻ For further information about the lighting see Light switch, page 1.41. ✍ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✧ ✟ ✑ ✡ ➧ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✔ ☛ ☛ ✠ ✓ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✑ ✔ ✓ ✵ ❍ ✳ downwards (1) to switch on the left-hand turn signal. Push the turn signal/hi beam stalk upwards (2) to switch on the right-hand turn signal. The corresponding warning light in the ☛ ✤ ✥ ✠ ✧ ☛ ✟ ✠ ✟ ✍ ★ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✒ ✔ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✗ ✡ ✠ instrument cluster will flash. ✳ ❋ ❑ ❍ 2. All the turn signal lamps and both turn The stalk returns to its rest position as the signal warning lights in the instrument steering wheel returns to its central position. cluster flash. 3. Press the hazard warning lamps button again to switch off. ❖ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

IGHTING

Parking lights ➯ ➲ ➷ ➛ ↔ ↔ ➢ ➝ ➔ ➟ ➠ ➙ ➜ ↕ ➡ ➙ ↔ ➡ ↔ ↔ ➢ ➛ ➢ ➒ ➣ ➑ ✃ ➐ ➏ ➎ right-hand side until resistance is felt. been switched on automatically, press The selected parking lights will then be the hazard warning lamps button once deactivated. to switch them off. NOTE: This will allow parking lights on both sides to be active at same time, and ❈ ❈ ❀ ❈ ✿ ✱ ✼ ✸ ✭ also allows one side to be deactivated, ✒ ✌ ✤ ✥ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ☛ ✓ ✦ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✝ ✥ ✑ ☛ ❚ ✟ ✳ ❑ whilst keeping the opposite side attract attention by sounding the horn and activated. flashing the turn signal lamps repeatedly. The panic alarm can be switched on by pressing the hazard warning lamps button for a period of 3 seconds or more. The horn will cease after the panic alarm has ➮ ➬ been active for a long period➝ ➛ ➙ of➞ ➙ time,↔ ➤ ➔ ➣ but➢ ➟ ↕ ➝ the➡ ➟ ↔ ➙ ↕ ➠ ➛ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ turn signal lamps will continue to flash. The activated when the ignition is switched horn can be re-initiated by pressing the off. hazard warning lamps button for a period of 3 1. To activate the parking lights, press the seconds or more. turn signal/hi beam stalk down for the To switch the panic alarm off, press the left-hand side or push up for the right- hazard warning lamps button briefly. hand side until resistance is felt. The selected parking lights will illuminate once the vehicle has been locked. 2. To deactivate the parking lights, press the turn signal/hi beam stalk down for the left-hand side or push up for the ❫ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

ASHERS A ND W IPERS ➈ ❮ ➀ ❿ ➂ ❰ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➈ ❮ ➀ ➻ ➈ ➄ ❰ Windscreen wipers ➭ ❀ ➭ ❈ ➫ ➭ ➴ ✽ ✱ ✭ ❣ ✪ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✰ ✪ ✭ ✸ ✱ ❣ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✱ ❣ ✪ ❣ ✬ ✼ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✒ ◆ ✡ ✒ ▼ ✵ ❋ ❑ ❑ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✡ ☛ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✗ ✔ ☛ ❳ ❋ ✳ (3) , to 2. Move the wiper stalk to the required operate the wipers at slow speed. position Return the stalk to position (1) to switch off. NOTE: If the windscreen wipers are ➭ ❈ switched on and the vehicle comes to a ✱ ❣ ➉ ✪ ✻ ✽ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✒ ◆ ✡ ✒ ▼ halt, the windscreen wipers ✵ ❋ ❑ ❑ (4) , to automatically switch to intermittent operate the wipers at fast speed. wipe, until the vehicle moves away. Return the stalk to position (1) to switch off. ❈ ❀ ❛ ➭ ✿ ✱ ✬ ✱ ✻ ✻ ❣ ✪ ✯ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✤ ✌ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✠ ☞ ❋ ♠ behind the interior mirror, measures the ✦ ☛ ✦ ✡ ✒ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✤ ✗ ☛ ✥ ❯ ❋ ❑ quantity of water on the screen and operates 2. Automatic wipe the wipers at the most appropriate speed. 3. Slow wipe To select, move the windscreen wiper stalk to 4. Fast wipe the automatic wipe position (2) . NOTE: Switch off the windscreen wipers The wipers will wipe once. The wipe frequency in dry weather, dirt can cause then depends on how wet the windscreen is. inadvertent wiper sweeps which could Only select the automatic wipe position in damage the wiper blades or windscreen. damp weather conditions or when it is raining. To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor, see Wiper Sensitivity, page 3.26. ❢ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

ASHERS A ND W IPERS ➭ ❈ ❀ ❵ Single wipe ✱ ❣ ✪ ❣ ❅ ✸ ✽ ✽ ✪ ✰ ✪ ✭ ✸ ✱ NOTE: The position of the washer jets are set during vehicle manufacture and should not need adjusting. If a problem occurs, consult your McLaren Retailer. ✍ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✓ ✤ ✌ ✔ ✠ ✍ ✥ ✒ ✍ ✠ ✟ ✓ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✍ ✗ ✑ ✒ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✓ ✦ ✡ ✡ ✥ ✠ ✵ ❋ ✴ ❋ ❑ ❋ ✳ ➋ ❋ ❑ ❑ ✴ ❍ ♠ wiper stalk and release. The wipers will The windscreen washers and wipers will operate once at slow speed, without initially operate at a slow speed while the stalk washers. is held. If the stalk is held for more than 2 2. For a fast single wipe, push and hold the seconds, the wiper will operate at high speed. wiper stalk down. The windscreen wipers When the stalk is released, the wipers will will perform a continuous fast wipe until complete their cycle and return to the parked the stalk is released. position. After a period of time the wipers will operate once more to wipe any remaining washer fluid from the windscreen. ❦ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

ASHERS A ND W IPERS

Wiper park positions ✡ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✍ ✔ ✟ ✠ ✒ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✤ ✤ ✟ ☛ ❄ ♠ ❑ ❑ ✵ are two alternative positions. Ensure the vehicle is in accessory mode. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you, the wipers will move through the following park positions each time the stalk is pulled: ❈ ➭ ❵ ✭ ❥ ✭ ✪ ✻ ✸ ✱ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✝ ✓ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✍ ✍ ✒ ✟ ✌ ✝ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✠ ◆ ✑ ✠ ✟ ✤ ❚ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✴ ❑ ❋ ✵ ❑ risk of damage to the wiper arms during periods of heavy snowfall and provide access for easier cleaning of accumulated snow. ❀ ➴ ❈ ➭ ✱ ✲ ✪ ✭ ❥ ✭ ✪ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✠ ✟ ✤ ❚ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ❑ ❋ ✵ ❑ diagonally to provide access for replacing the wiper blades, see Replacing the wiper blades, page 5.30. ❈ ❝ ❈ ✿ ➭ ✭ ✼ ❥ ✭ ✬ ☛ ✍ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✍ ✑ ✟ ✟ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✒ ★ ✥ ✠ ✒ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✠ ✑ ✠ ✟ ✤ ❚ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✴ ✳ ❑ ❋ ✵ ❑ lower edge of the windscreen. ❧ ❖ ♦ ♥ BEFORE Y OU D RIVE

OSE L IFT ➸ ➼ ➂ ➇ ➀ ➈ ❾ ➁ Nose Lift Operation ❈ ❀ ❝ ❀ ✾ ➫ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✰ ✼ ✯ ✬ ❅ ✽ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✬ ✽ ✬ ❊ ✸ ✸ If nose lift is used when in motion, slight steering column, whenever the engine is Nose Lift be used as a jacking system. adjustments to the steering feel may be running and the doors are closed. Using the Nose Lift to access the experienced, this is normal and does not NOTE: Nose lift will be unavailable if underneath of the car may result in affect the operation of the vehicle. launch mode is active. serious injury. Access to nose lift can be obtained by using NOTE: Nose lift lowering is available only Nose lift gives you the option to raise or lower the menu structure, see LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, if the door is closed. the front of the vehicle dependent on the page 3.4. current vehicle ride height. Hold the menu control stalk up for one ✿ ❀ ❀ ❛ ✪ ✯ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✽ ✽ ✪ second to quickly access the menu. A Nose ride height can only be raised when confirmation tone will be heard. traveling at speeds below 31 mph (50 kph). The nose will automatically lower at speeds Alternatively, access nose lift using the menu above 37 mph (60 kph). structure, see LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4. NOTE: If the nose lift icon on the right- The left-hand display will exit after the hand side of the central display is amber, timeout duration has been exceeded back to the system is not available. Do not drive home screen if there is no activity on the the vehicle at high speed and contact menu. your McLaren Retailer as soon as See Nose Lift, page 3.12, for full information. possible. The front suspension can be left fully raised for extended periods, but it may relax to a lower level over time. If the nose is left in a raised position for a long ☛ ✥ ✤ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✓ ✟ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✝ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✌ ✦ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✝ ✝ ☞ ✴ ✳ ❍ ❍ ❍ period, a system reset may occur when the the menu control stalk on the left of the engine is next started to return the nose to normal ride height. ➦ ❖ ♦ ♥

♥

2 ✘

➊ ✙

✙

♦

➊ ✏ ✏

✏

✷

.49

2.33

✎ ✎ ✎ ✎

.2.32 .2.40

.2.45

...2.32

...... 2.33

...... 2.46

...... 2.44

...... 2.37

...... 2.43

...... 2.34

...... 2.4

...... 2

......

⑨

......

③

t......

✥

✧

⑥

✥

✍

①

✤

✡

✉

✡

⑤

❑

⑨

✉

✔

⑦

❷

⑨

✠

✡

✍

⑥

✉

⑩

❑

✡

✳

❑

①

✓

⑦

✉

☛

✦

✥

✓

①

✉

◆

⑥

☛

✑

✥

❷

✥

✉

☛

❺

✌

✠

✥

⑩

✟

⑦

❋

⑨

❶

③ ✳

✤

✡

❋

✳

⑨

✥ ☛

✠

⑥

✥

①

✉ ①

◆

☛

✳

✡

①

✥

✠ ☛

①

③ ✌

✌

☛

✉

✡ ✥

☛

✉

✌

❸

☛

✍

✥

✍

◆

✓

✡

✥

❸

②

❯ ➋ Electronic brake pre-fill...... ❙ Track use...... Track Electronic Stability Control...... (TPMS) System Monitoring Tire Pressure ...... Brake discBrake wiping...... Canceling cruise control...... Brake assist system...... Brake Using cruise controlUsing cruise ...... use...... Normal/Road fuel...... Recommended Hill holdHill control...... Increasing cruise speed...... Brake-steer...... Reducing cruiseReducing speed...... Resuming a storedResuming speed...... a

◗ ❘

✉

❶

① ❸

⑥

❶ ⑧

⑥ ⑥

✏

✎ ✙

✗

✎ ✎ ✚

✎

✎ ✎

✎

.. 2.27

.... 2.25

..... 2.29 ..... 2.16

...... 2.20

...... 2.24

...... 2.9

...... 2.10

...... 2.14

③

...... 2.7

⑨

...... 2.15

...... 2.4

❷

⑥

...... 2.11

...... 2.21

...... 2.18

...... 2.3

...... 2.17

...... 2.21

...... 2.31

❷

......

❶

......

✉

......

③

⑥

❷

⑤

⑥ ①

⑥

✍

①

✔

✒

③

✠

✓

⑧

①

✌

④

✟

☛

⑦

❷

③ ✌

✒

✔ ❺

✝

✍

④

②

✟

✔

⑩

✉

✝

✥

①

✇

✠

✌

②

✧

③

✝

✟

✡

③

⑦

✍ ☛

③

✴

✡

③

❋

✍

✤ ✉

✡

⑦

①

✡

✟ ✥

✍

✠

⑨

✡

⑨ ◆

✝

✡

✠

✥

◆ ✉

✥ ⑩

✡

☛

✑

✌

⑤

◆

✡

✡ ✝

✉ R

Accelerator position...... pedal Manual/Automatic mode...... Brake pedal...... Handling control ...... Switching on the ignition ...... Lights...... Instruments Warning and Parking brake...... positionsGear ...... Active button...... Powertrain control ...... Anti-lockSystem Braking ...... Seamless shift gearbox gear positions...... gear gearbox Seamless shift Starting/stopping the engine...... Telemetry Track McLaren ...... Driving ...... ViewRear Camera (RVC)...... Exhaust Temperature Monitoring...... Exhaust Parking Sensors...... Launch controlLaunch ...... ♣ ☞

◗

⑥ ①

D STARTINGAND DRIVING ✇

③ ⑩ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➂ ❮ ➅ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➃ ➁ ➂ ➸ ❮ ➄ ➸ ➈ Vehicle electrical status ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✧ ✥ ✝ ✥ ✍ ✧ ✍ ✥ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❑ ❛ ❈ ✾ ❣ ✪ ❥ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✻ ✱ ✸ ✹ ✠ ✒ ✤ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✒ following statuses according to the criteria ➫ ❡ ❡ ❜ ➴ ❛ ❡ ➴ ❑ ❉ START/STOP button button is pressed, when car is detailed. pressed, when the car is in Sleep mode. in Accessory mode. NOTE: The engine can be started from Time, odometer reading and battery status NOTE: There is no timeout with ignition any of the following states, except are available in the left-hand display. Fuel on. Be aware that the battery could Locked. If the car is in Sleep mode, the gauge operates in right-hand display. become discharged. START/STOP button will need to be If there is no further activity after two ❈ pressed for more than two seconds. ✭ ❥ ✺ ✸ minutes, the vehicle will return to the Sleep ☛ ✡ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✌ ☛ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✥ ✌ ✎ ✡ ✔ ✗ ✠ ➧ ✑ ✡ ✗ ✟ ✌ ✌ ❙ ✡ ✡ ❙ NOTE: If the vehicle detects the battery status. ❑ ❑ ✳ ♠ ❑ ✳ ✳ ✳ charge is getting too low, it will adopt the ✿ ❈ ✹ ✽ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✰ ✲ ✪ ✬ ❣ ✬ ❀ ❀ ❛ Awake status to conserve energy. ✮ ✭ ✬ ✽ ✽ ✪ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✧ ✓ ✝ ✠ ✥ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✟ ◆ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✤ ☛ ❪ ♠ ✴ ➫ ❡ ❡ ❜ ➴ ❛ ❡ ➴ Accessory and Ignition will be prohibited, button is pressed, when car is may not be able to supply enough voltage but Crank will still be available. This is to in Awake mode. and will activate power saving mode. allow the engine to be started so that Windows and heater/air conditioning battery recharging can commence. WARNING: When power saving mode controls operate. IRIS and instrument cluster is active, the climate control and menus are available. ❃ ❀ ✬ ✰ ✪ ❥ steering will operate with reduced ✡ ✤ ✒ ✒ ✍ ✒ ✧ ✠ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✝ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ❑ ❋ ❋ ✵ If there is no further activity after 15 minutes, effect. the vehicle will return to the Sleep status. NOTE: When power saving mode is ➴ ➭ ✪ ✪ ✼ Accessory mode can also be entered by active, the message "Battery ✡ ✤ ✒ ✒ ✍ ✒ ✧ ✠ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✝ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✡ ☛ ✓ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ❑ ❋ ❋ ✵ pressing the OK button on the instrument Management Active - See Owners cluster menu stalk. The key must be present Manual! appears on the instrument within the cockpit area for this function to be cluster. available. ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Switching on the ignition ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✟ ✒ ☛ ✦ ✑ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✗ ✔ ☛ ❳ ✵ ✴ ❍ 3. The ignition will switch on, the oil vehicle. temperature, water temperature and fuel gauges will operate and several of the warning lights will illuminate as a self-test. The instrument cluster will fully illuminate.

2. To switch on the ignition without starting the engine, press the START/STOP button, without depressing the brake pedal. NOTE: If the vehicle is in Awake mode, press the START/STOP button twice with the brake pedal released. ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Instruments and Warning Lights ✌ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✦ ✦ ✥ ✤ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✤ ✥ ◆ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✝ ✡ ☛ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✍ ✟ ✑ ❯ ❍ ✳ ✳ ✿ ➫ ❈ ❂ ➭ ❃ ➪ ❈ ❈ ➫ ❣ ✪ ✱ ✲ ✽ ✯ ✭ ✻ ✭ ✻ ✪ ✸ ✽ ✲ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✸ ✱ ✽ ✱ ✻ ❣ ✫ ✶ ✪ ✼ ❅ ✱ ✪ ✰ ✮ ✲ ✭ ✸ ✪ ✲ categories, according to the color that they illuminate. • RED, AMBER or YELLOW - indicates that a fault has been detected. A fault indicated by a RED light is more important than one displayed in AMBER or YELLOW. • BLUE or GREEN - indicates that a system or feature is switched on and operating. ✠ ✟ ✡ ✚ ✌ ✡ ✡ ✎ ✧ ✒ ✑ ✗ ✝ ✟ ❚ ❑ ♠ ✳ 2. Speedometer, page 3.3 ✌ ☛ ✧ ✟ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✒ ✤ ✥ ✔ ◆ ✥ ✟ ✒ ✤ ✍ ✠ ✤ ☛ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ❑ ❑ ✴ ➩ information to the driver and will vary depending on the mode and vehicle settings selected. ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING ❃ ➪ ➪ ❈ ❃ ❈ ➴ ❵ ✻ ✽ ✫ ✻ ✹ ❅ ✪ ❅ ✸ ✰ ✱ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✸ ✰ ✭ ✱ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✧ ✒ ❙ ✌ ✡ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✔ ✒ ▼ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✥ ❚ ✳ ✴ (TPMS), page 2.37 Turn signals, page 1.44

Seat belt warning light, page 1.29

Rear fog lamp, page 1.43

Hi beam headlamps, page 1.42

Sidelamps, page 1.42

Supplementary Restraint System ✡ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✒ ✠ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✥ ✌ ◆ ✟ ✟ ☛ ✍ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ ❪ ✳ ✳ ✵ warning light, page 1.34 menus. ❫ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING ➪ ❜ ➪ ❈ ❃ ➴ ❈ ❵ Right-hand Display Overview ✻ ✽ ❅ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✹ ✰ ✱ ❅ ✸ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✱ ✰ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✒ ✍ ❙ ✥ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ❳ ♠ ❁ ❍ ✴ page 2.34 Turn signals, page 1.44

Engine warning light, page 2.14

Anti-lock Braking System status light, page 2.32 Brake warning light, page 2.10

Parking brake status, page 2.9 ✡ ✠ ✟ ✓ ✚ ❼ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✚ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✗ ❚ ✡ ✍ ✥ ◗ ❑ ♠ ✳ ❑ 2. Water Temperature, page 3.36 3. Fuel Level and Range, page 3.37 4. Handling control, page 2.25 Powertrain control, page 2.27 ❢ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Seamless shift gearbox gear positions ✠ ✒ ✝ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✑ ✥ ✟ ❚ ✒ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✠ ✡ ❍ ✳ ❏ ❑ ✪ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✶ NOTE: If reverse or drive is selected at

manual mode. Automatic ✟ mode✍ ✥ ✡ ✟ ✍ ◆ ✟ ✡ is✠ ✟ selected✠ ✔ ✤ ✠ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✟ ✟ ✡ ☛ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✔ ✍ ✍ ☞ ❍ ❋ ✳ speeds above 6 mph (10 kph), the unless the driver chooses manual mode, see Gear changes will be automatic, unless transmission will engage neutral, as a Manual/Automatic mode, page 2.21. If manual mode has been selected. self protection feature. manual mode is active, gear changes are When drive is selected and the brakes are When traveling at speeds below 6 mph made using the gearshift paddles, see released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly (10 kph), neutral can be selected by Gearshift paddles, page 2.23. without any throttle use making it useful for pressing the "N! button. parking maneuvers and for moving off in When reverse is selected and the brakes queuing traffic. are released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly without any throttle use ❈ ❝ ✭ ✻ ✼ ✯ ✪ making it useful for parking maneuvers. ☛ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✟ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✒ ✤ ✍ ✠ ✡ ❲ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✳ ✳ ✳ ❘ ✳ brakes will allow the vehicle to move freely, e.g. for pushing or towing. For more information on use of neutral for towing, see Towing for recovery, page 5.44. ❜ ✪ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✲ ✪ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✧ ✓ ✝ ✠ ✥ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ☛ ☛ ❄ ♠ gear when the vehicle is stationary. When carrying out parking maneuvers that NOTE: The letter on each button will require rapid changes from drive to reverse illuminate red to identify if the vehicle is and back again, it is possible to engage in Drive, Neutral or Reverse. reverse or drive at speeds up to 6mph (10 kph) whilst traveling in the opposite direction. ❦ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Gearshift paddles As an alternative, upshifts can be made will then go down through all gears by pushing the left-hand paddle away sequentially until the optimum gear is from you and downshifts can be made reached or you release the paddle. by pushing the right-hand paddle away When the vehicle speed is below 6 mph from you. (10 kph) or the vehicle is stationary with a The gearshift paddles operate irrespective of gear selected, select a downshift and hold the the handling and powertrain program paddle to select neutral. selected, and there is no need to release the accelerator pedal to change gear. WARNING: For safety, in manual mode only, the vehicle will monitor engine speed and may perform an automatic gear change if necessary. WARNING: Do not change down for ✥ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✌ ✦ ✓ ✓ ✥ ✑ ✒ ✔ ❚ ❑ ♠ ❑ ght-hand paddle towards additional engine braking on a you. To downshift pull the left-hand paddle slippery surface. towards you. The current gear position NOTE: If operating the paddles in appears in the gear position display, see Gear automatic mode, the gearbox will revert Position Indicator, page 3.35. to automatic changes if an eight second NOTE: The single-piece paddle and period elapses without a gear change central pivot enables upshifts and being made. downshifts to be made using either To immediately shift to the lowest possible paddle. gear whilst the vehicle is moving, select and hold a downshift on the paddle. The vehicle ❧ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Parking brake ➲ ➝ ➝ ➞ ↕ ➜ ➢ ➙ ➠ ➛ ➛ ➣ ➔ ➙ ➞ ➡ ➟ ↔ ➙ ↕ ➠ ➒ ➙ ➑ ➛ ➐ ➢ ➏ ➎ ➭ ❈ ❈ ❈ ✬ ✸ ✭ ✭ ✪ ✬ ❤ ✪ ✱ ❥ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❥ ✭ slopes, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. When parking on steep uphill slopes, turn the front wheels away from the kerb. ❈ ❈ ❈ ✽ ✻ ✽ ✯ ✭ ✻ ✪ ❤ ❥ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❥ ✭ ✥ ✌ ✍ ✑ ✔ ✓ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✑ ✠ ✌ ✤ ✟ ☛ ✦ ✟ ✥ ❄ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✳ ❑ ✵ ❍ ❑ ✵ ✳ ❑ is flashing, the parking brake has failed to engage/disengage. To resolve, engage/disengage the parking brake again. See Parking brake operation, page 2.9. ☛ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✑ ✟ ✝ ✒ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✟ ❚ ☛ ✟ ✑ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✍ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✳ ❋ ❑ ✳ ✵ ❍ ✵ ✳ ❑ ♠ To disengage the parking brake, keep the outwards, the red parking brake applied brake pedal depressed and push the parking status light in the instrument cluster brake switch inwards, the red parking brake illuminates. applied status light in the instrument cluster extinguishes. WARNING: If the parking brake is manually released, the vehicle may start to move. ➦ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Brake pedal ➹ ❈ ❀ ➭ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ❤ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✪ ✮ ✽ ✪ ✸ ✻ ✪ ❥ ✻ ✬ ✸ ❊ ✬ ✶ ➮ ➷ ❀ ❈ ❈ ❈ ➭ ➣ ➞ ➡ ➟ ➙ ↔ ➙ ↕ ↔ ➔ ➠ ↕ ➡ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➒ ➣ ➑ ✃ ➐ ➏ ➎ ✽ ✱ ✰ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✰ ✽ ✩ ❥ ✸ ✰

the driver!s footwell.❈ ❈ ❝ ❈ ✾ Ensure➭ ❝ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ that floor manually released, it will automatically ✪ ✭ ✱ ✯ ✪ ✭ ✭ ✪ ✽ ❤ ❥ ✰ ❊ ❣ ✪ release as the vehicle is driven off mats or carpets are properly secured period of bedding in. For the first forward, or in reverse as long as the and do not obstruct the pedals. 625 miles (1,000 km), avoid situations following conditions are met: If objects become trapped between where heavy braking is required. • driver!s door is closed the pedals, you may not be able to Brake disc and pad wear depends on the brake or accelerate, and this could • driver!s seat belt is buckled driving style and driving conditions. lead to an accident. ❈ ❈ NOTE: If the parking brake is not ✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ ✼ ✹ ✸ ❣ ✱ ✭ ✪ ✸ ✩ ✭ ❥ WARNING: The braking system is manually applied it will automatically ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✟ ☛ ❚ ✠ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✧ ☛ ✓ ✥ ✠ ✍ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✟ ✥ ✑ ✍ ✍ ✥ servo assisted when❍ ✵ the✳ ❋ ✳ engine❋ is apply when the engine is switched off. running. The brakes will still function when the ignition is switched on as a NOTE: It is only possible to disengage the with the engine off, but more system test. If the brake warning light parking brake with the ignition on. The pressure will be required to operate illuminates at any other time, a fault is parking brake can be applied in all them. indicated. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety ignition states, including car asleep. permits and contact your McLaren Retailer WARNING: Do not rest your foot on immediately. NOTE: In the event of total footbrake the brake pedal while traveling as this failure, the parking brake can be applied may overheat the brakes, reduce when the vehicle is moving to slow the their efficiency and cause excessive vehicle. wear. WARNING: If the brake warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and contact your McLaren Retailer immediately. ➨ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Starting/stopping the engine ❝ ✾ ❝ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✸ ✪ ❅ ❣ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✯ ✭ ✭ ✪ ❊ ✲ ✪ ➴ ❈ ➴ ➭ ➭ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✻ ✱ ✻ ✭ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✬ ✸ ✻ ✱

the vehicle is in an enclosed space. ❝ ❈ ● ✾ ❈ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ✬ ✹ ❤ ✭ ❊ ✬ ✪ ❅ ❥ ✸ ✭ ❅ ✽ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✒ ☛ ✦ ✑ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✗ ✔ ☛ ❳ ✵ ✴ ❍ Exhaust fumes contain poisonous position to lock the gears. The parking carbon monoxide. Breathing exhaust brake is the only means of preventing fumes could lead to unconsciousness the vehicle moving. and death. NOTE: Do not depress the accelerator NOTE: Do not depress the accelerator pedal when stopping the engine. pedal when starting the engine. Do not switch the engine off immediately after high speed/high load running. Allow it to run for 2 minutes so the engine temperature returns to normal. NOTE: When parking on steep downhill slopes, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. When parking on steep uphill 2. Depress the brake pedal, press and slopes, turn the front wheels away from release the START/STOP button and the kerb. the engine will start. 1. Pull the parking brake switch outwards 3. If the START/STOP button is pressed to apply. again while the engine is cranking, NOTE: If the parking brake is not applied cranking is stopped. manually, it will apply automatically when the engine is stopped. Automatic application can be overridden by holding the parking brake switch in the off position whilst opening the driver!s door. ♥ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING ✿ ➴ ➭ ❈ ✍ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✓ ✡ ☛ ✌ ✝ ✎ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✮ ✬ ✸ ✭ ✬ ✱ ✪ ✻ ❀ ➴ ❈ ➴ ✿ ➪ ➭ ➳ ✬ ✻ ✪ ✻ ✻ ✬ ✭ ✽ ✻ ✮ ✽ ☛ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✝ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✑ ❚ ✳ ✴ ❑ ✴ when conditions allow in order to reduce fuel consumption and exhaust gas emissions and restarts it again when required. The following conditions must be met for the system to automatically stop the engine: • driver is detected as present • driving speed exceeded 6 mph (10 kph) since previous stop • engine at normal operating temperature • vehicle battery fully charged • air conditioning demand not too high • Normal Powertrain mode active ☛ ✒ ✒ ✑ ✍ ✝ ✍ ✔ ✥ ✥ ☛ ✔ ✡ ✓ ✌ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✒ ✍ ◆ ✟ ✌ ✔ ☞ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✡ 3. Press the START/STOP button. The ❋ ❋ ❍ ✴ ❋ ❑ engine stops, the vehicle enters the in the central display. Accessory state, see Vehicle electrical The icon will illuminate amber if conditions status, page 2.2. The immobilizer is have not been met and the system is not activated. available. NOTE: If the START/STOP button is If all conditions have been met and the pressed for more than a second, the system is available, the icon will illuminate vehicle will enter the Awake state for a green. brief time before returning to Accessory state if no further inputs are made, see Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2. ✷ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING ☛ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✒ ☛ ✍ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✧ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✍ ✑ ✥ ❚ ❀ ❈ ❈ ✳ ✴ ❑ ✴ ❋ ✹ ✲ ✪ ✱ ✸ ✻ ✱ ✶ ✻ NOTE: The system is active by default when the brake pedal is depressed and the when the ignition is switched on, even if vehicle has come to a complete stop. it has been previously deactivated. The engine will automatically restart when the brake pedal is released. NOTE: If the parking brake is engaged while the engine is stopped, the engine will not restart when the brake pedal is released. Depress the brake pedal, disengage the parking brake and then release the brake pedal in order to initiate the automatic restart. NOTE: The engine may automatically ☛ ✒ ✌ ✌ ◗ ✒ ✓ ✌ ✌ ✠ ❙ ✟ ✧ ❙ ✌ ✡ ❙ ✌ ✔ ✒ ✝ ❳ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ re-start before❍ ➋ ➩ ❑ ➋ the✴ brake pedal is released in order to maintain electrical, to deactivate the system. The light in the air conditioning or other vehicle button will illuminate and the status light in demand. the instrument cluster will be extinguished. Press the button again to activate the system. NOTE: If the deactivation button is pressed when the engine has been automatically stopped, the engine will re-start. ▲ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Driving ❈ ❈ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❣ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✮ ✶ ENVIRONMENTAL: When starting from • driver!s seat belt is buckled cold, gear changes occur at higher ❝ ✾ ❝ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✫ ✫ ✬ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✭ ✯ ✻ ✭ ✪ ❊ ✲ ✪ 4. Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. while driving, there will be no engine speeds. The catalytic converter ❈ assistance for the steering or the foot will reach its operating temperature✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ ✼ ✹ ❣ ✸ ✱ ✪ ✸ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ➳ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✧ ☛ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✍ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✥ ✌ ✍ ✟ ✑ ✑ ❚ brake. You will need more effort to quicker and✳ ✳ ❋ ✳ reduce engine emissions. steer and brake and could lose 1. With the engine running, press and hold when the ignition is on and extinguishes control of the vehicle and cause an the brake pedal. as soon as the engine is started, provided no faults exist. accident. 2. Select drive or reverse gear, or initiate an NOTE: Do not drive at high engine upshift by operating the gearshift If the light illuminates while driving, an engine speeds until the engine has reached paddles. For more information, see management fault has been detected and normal operating temperature. Gearshift paddles, page 2.23 and Gear reduced engine performance may be positions, page 2.20. experienced. Stop the vehicle as soon as NOTE: The doors will lock when the 3. Keep the brake pedal depressed and safety permits and contact your McLaren vehicle reaches a speed of Retailer immediately. approximately 9 mph (15 kph). Auto lock release the parking brake switch. The red status light in the instrument cluster will ➭ ❃ ✿ ✿ ✿ can be set in the instrument cluster, see ✬ ❅ ✱ ✪ ✪ ✰ ✬ Auto Door Lock, page 3.23. be extinguished. ✍ ✍ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✟ ◆ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✟ ✡ ✤ ✒ ✧ ✡ ✧ ✥ ✧ ✞ ✒ ✑ ✴ ❑ NOTE: During extensive parking WARNING: If the parking brake is when vehicle systems detect a fault which maneuvering the steering assistance manually released, the vehicle may may cause further damage unless vehicle or might feel slightly stiffer. This is normal start to move. system performance is restricted. Care should and designed to protect the steering NOTE: If the parking brake is not be taken while driving in this mode. Contact system from overheating. manually released, it will automatically your McLaren Retailer immediately. release as the vehicle is driven off ✿ ❀ ❈ ❀ forward, or in reverse as long as the ✹ ✸ ✱ ✬ ✲ ➳ ✱ ✸ ✭ ✬ ✰ ✱ ✼ ✤ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✥ ✧ ✑ ✒ ☛ ✝ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✒ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✓ ✦ ✤ ✧ ✡ ❄ ◆ ✒ ✠ following✴ ❍ ✴ conditions❍ are❑ met: following this advice: • all doors are closed ❖ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Exhaust Temperature Monitoring ✌ ✔ ✓ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✑ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✥ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✔ ✧ ✓ ✒ ✓ ☛ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❏ ✴ Accelerate smoothly and gently from a engine speed for long durations, and standing start. temperatures to protect the catalytic sudden and repeated changes in throttle • When in manual mode, avoid high converters from damage caused by demand. overheating. engine rpm by changing to a higher gear NOTE: High exhaust temperatures can as soon as possible. If excessive exhaust temperatures are cause damage to catalytic converters The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) will measured, a warning will be displayed on the and should be avoided by practicing illuminate when an upshift would left-hand side of the instrument cluster. careful driving. maintain optimum economy. The vehicle speed should be reduced as soon If the warnings persist, contact your McLaren NOTE: Not available in all markets, as this message is observed. Refrain from Retailer. consult your McLaren Retailer. maneuvers involving high engine speed and • Avoid laboring or over-revving the high engine load (full throttle) to allow the engine. exhausts to cool. The message will remain until the temperature has reduced. • Switch off the air conditioning when it is not needed. If the exhaust temperature remains at an • Avoid journeys where frequent stop start excessive level, a second warning is displayed driving is involved. and Limphome mode is activated. The engine performance will remain limited until the • Ensure that your driving style suits the vehicle is restarted. prevailing road and traffic conditions; allow time for smooth, progressive NOTE: Catalytic converter over acceleration and braking. temperature warnings are not likely to • Use a reputable fuel economy tracking be observed during normal driving and website to track your mileage and fuel are the result of extreme operating usage. conditions. For example, high exhaust temperatures can be caused by extended track driving, maintaining high ❫ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Parking Sensors The light around the parking sensors button NOTE: The parking sensors are for will illuminate red to indicate that parking guidance only and are not intended to sensors are active. replace the driver!s visual checks for The center sensors on the front bumper have obstructions when maneuvering. The a range of approximately 3 feet (1 meter). The parking sensors may not detect some center sensors in the rear bumper have a obstructions, such as narrow posts or range of approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters). small obstructions close to the ground such as kerbs. An intermittent tone is heard when an obstruction is within range. As the vehicle The rear parking sensors are automatically moves closer to an obstruction, the switched off when reverse gear is de-selected. frequency of the tone increases. When the The front parking sensors are automatically distance between the sensors and the switched off when the vehicle speed exceeds obstruction is less than approximately 16 mph (26 kph) and drive is selected. If the parking sensors have been manually ☛ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✒ ✠ ❚ ✔ ✟ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✔ ✴ ❑ ✵ ✳ 1.5 feet (40 centimeters), the tone becomes obstructions while maneuvering at low continuous. activated, by pressing the center of the speeds. The system comprises four ultrasonic button, the front parking sensors will become WARNING: The parking sensors may sensors in the front bumper, four ultrasonic active again when the vehicle speed reduces not detect moving objects such as sensors in the rear bumper and two sounders. to 12 mph (20 kph). children and animals until they are Each sounder has a different pitch to indicate dangerously close. Always maneuver The parking sensors can be switched off whether the obstruction is at the front or the with caution and always use your manually by pressing the center of the rear of the vehicle. mirrors, turn your head and look button, when in drive or neutral. The parking The front parking sensors are automatically behind you. sensors cannot be manually switched off if switched on when the engine is running and Reverse gear is selected. When manually drive is selected. The rear parking sensors are switched off, the light around the button will switched on when reverse gear is selected. be extinguished. ❢ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Rear View Camera (RVC) ✍ ✍ ✟ ✓ ☛ ✟ ✧ ✔ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ ✴ ❍ ✴ switched off, both the front and rear sensors will still switch on when reverse gear is selected and remain on until drive or neutral is selected again. If a fault is detected, a long high-pitched tone will sound. If the sensors are obscured by dirt, ice or snow, clean them. If the problem persists, contact your McLaren Retailer. ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✧ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✟ ✧ ❚ ✡ ✡ ✥ ✟ ❁ ❘ ➚ ❘ ❁ ❋ A colored grid is overlaid onto the live video the center of the rear bumper. The live video feed as a guide to the proximity of visible feed is displayed on the IRIS screen when the objects to the rear bumper of the vehicle. function is active. Each colored box starts at the rear of the NOTE: If the video feed is blurred or vehicle and extends 10 inches unclear, carefully clean the lens with (25 centimeters) beyond the widest point of water and a soft cloth. the vehicle and extends back, away from the vehicle. The red static box extends back 1.5 feet (40 centimeters) from the rear of the vehicle. ❦ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

McLaren Track Telemetry ❈ ❝ ❡ ❃ ✾ ❀ ❀ ❡ ❝ ❈ ❞ ❂ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✸ ✪ ✭ ✭ ❊ ✪ ❥ ❅ ✝ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✒ ✔ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✤ ✝ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✟ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✦ ❼ ✌ ✡ ❚ ✠ ❼ ❍ ❏ ❍ ✵ ❏ ✳ (2 meters) from the rear of the vehicle, with Telemetry system is intended for an additional line at 3.3 feet (1 meter). track use only. The driver is responsible for safety and The yellow dynamic box extends back 10 feet compliance at all times. (3 meters) from the rear of the vehicle, with additional lines at 6.6 feet (2 meters) and ➫ ❣ ✪ ✱ ✲ ✭ ✪ ✲ 3.3 feet (1 meter). The yellow box will curve, in

The McLaren Track Telemetry system relation to steering angle, indicating the provides timing data recording and current path of the vehicle. graphical visualization for track use, e.g. NOTE: The rear view camera is for circuits and hill-climbs. guidance only and is not intended to • Live data recording can be triggered replace the driver!s visual checks for manually or linked to vehicle movement. obstructions when maneuvering. The • During a recording, graphical displays rear view camera may not show some The RVC can be manually activated by are provided for timing data, obstructions in certain ambient light or selecting REAR VIEW CAMERA from the IRIS performance delta, track maps and weather conditions. APPS screen. vehicle speed. NOTE: The steering guide grid will not be When the RVC has been manually • Track performance can be analyzed in a displayed if a steering angle fault exists. activated, it can be deactivated by data viewer, and navigated via the lap The RVC is automatically activated when touching the on-screen icon. The RVC will number, track position or track distance. also be deactivated if the screen is touched reverse gear is selected and automatically • Custom track maps are created anywhere below the status bar or any of the deactivated 10 seconds after a forward gear is automatically and can be manually physical IRIS buttons are pressed. selected or immediately if the vehicle!s edited. Multiple track layouts or forward speed exceeds 6 mph (10 kph). NOTE: The RVC cannot be manually configurations are supported for each deactivated if it has been automatically venue. activated by selecting reverse gear. ❧ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ TARTING A ND D RIVING

Different drivers can be associated with each recording. • An optional camera system is integrated to offer interior and exterior views of track driving.

To launch the application, navigate to the APPS screen and select MCLAREN TRACK TELEMETRY. ➦ ♥ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ EAMLESS S HIFT G EARBOX ❾ ❮ ➄ ➀ ➃ ➸ ➼ ➂ ➻ ➈ ➈ ➈ ➀ ➇ ➾ ➄ ➀ ➈ Overview Gear positions ✑ ✝ ✌ ✓ ✍ ✡ ✠ ✝ ✑ ✟ ✘ ✍ ❚ ✒ ✡ ✟ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✤ ✡ ❍ ✳ ➩ ❏ ❑ ♠ When drive is selected and the brakes are Seamless Shift Gearbox that can be operated released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly in automatic or manual mode. without any throttle use making it useful for Automatic mode is selected unless the driver parking maneuvers and for moving off in chooses manual mode, see queuing traffic. Manual/Automatic mode, page 2.21. ❈ ❝ ✭ ✻ ✼ ✯ ✪ In automatic mode, the gearbox ☛ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✟ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✠ ✡ ❲ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✳ ✳ ✳ ❘ ✳ automatically optimizes the shift points to brakes will allow the vehicle to move suit your style of driving by selecting the most freely, e.g. for pushing or towing. For more appropriate gear depending on: information on use of neutral for towing, see • Powertrain control, page 2.27 Towing for recovery, page 5.44. • Accelerator pedal position, page 2.21 ❜ ✪ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✲ ✪ • Vehicle speed ✔ ☛ ☛ ✒ ✌ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✓ ✥ ✑ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✒ ✦ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ❍ ✳ ❑ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✧ ✓ ✝ ✠ ✥ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ☛ ☛ ❄ ♠ • Braking effort NOTE: The letter on each button will gear when the vehicle is stationary. NOTE: Allow the engine and gearbox to illuminate red to identify if the vehicle is When carrying out parking maneuvers that warm up before driving at high engine in Drive, Neutral or Reverse. require rapid changes from drive to reverse speeds and high loads. and back again, it is possible to engage

✪ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✶ reverse or drive at speeds up to 6 mph Avoid prolonged spinning of the rear (10 kph) whilst traveling in the opposite ✟ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✟ ✍ ◆ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✠ ✔ ✤ ✠ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✟ ✟ ✡ ☛ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✔ ✍ ✍ ☞ wheels when driving on❍ slippery ❋ surfaces✳ Gear changes will be automatic, unless direction. as this could damage the drivetrain. manual mode has been selected. NOTE: If reverse or drive is selected at speeds above 6 mph (10 kph), the transmission will engage neutral, as a self protection feature. ➨ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ EAMLESS S HIFT G EARBOX

Accelerator pedal position Manual/Automatic mode ✒ ✡ ✑ ✑ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✓ ☛ ✍ ✥ ✦ ◆ ✥ ☛ ✠ ✥ ✤ ✦ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ❋ ✳ ✴ ➮ ➲ ➯ ➔ ➞ ➜ ➝ ➛ ➛ ➛ ➠ ➔ ➢ ➣ ➠ ↔ ➟ ➙ ↕ ➝ ➛ ↔ ➡ ➣ ➙ ➛ ➢ (10 kph), neutral can be selected by Seamless Shift Gearbox changes gear. pressing the "N! button. With light accelerator pedal use, upshifts are When reverse is selected and the brakes made at lower engine speeds. With firmer are released, the vehicle will begin to accelerator pedal use, upshifts are made at move slowly without any throttle use higher engine speeds. making it useful for parking maneuvers. ❀ ✸ ❣ ✬ ✱ ✰ ➌ ❥ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✥ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✝ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✤ ✥ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✝ ✤ ✥ ✒ ✔ ❭ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✳ ✵ ❋ acceleration when in automatic mode. Depress the accelerator pedal fully beyond the pressure point, a click will be felt through the pedal. The gearbox will downshift

immediately to the lowest appropriate gear,✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ACTIVE button (1) to switch on the and maximum acceleration will follow. Once active dynamics panel. the pedal pressure is released, kickdown will The halo around the ACTIVE button will come cease and normal gear changes will resume. on. When selecting the different drive modes, NOTE: Moderate accelerator pedal their respective button will become pressure may also cause the gearbox to illuminated. You can deactivate your drive downshift, depending on vehicle speed. mode selection at any time by pressing the ACTIVE button again. Press the MANUAL The gear (manual mode) or the gear position button (2) to select manual mode. (automatic mode) selected will be shown in the instrument cluster. ♥ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ EAMLESS S HIFT G EARBOX

Press the MANUAL button again to revert to automatic mode. ✔ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✠ ✔ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✟ ✤ ❚ ✒ ✡ ✒ ✧ ❑ ✴ ❍ ✳ ❏ M and When in manual mode and driving more the currently selected gear. All forward gear economically, the Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) changes are made by operating the gearshift will illuminate when an upshift would The gearbox mode indicator displays A. All paddles, see Gearshift paddles, page 2.23. maintain optimum economy. The GSI will not gear changes occur automatically, but if a An audible shift indicator will sound to illuminate if the requested acceleration or gearshift paddle is operated the gearbox will indicate that an upshift is required to deceleration cannot be met with a higher adopt a temporary manual mode. This mode maintain optimum performance. gear. See Economical driving, page 2.14. will remain active for as long as the driver For setting options see Performance Shift NOTE: Only available in Normal continues to make manual gear changes, Cue (PSC), page 3.23. powertrain and handling modes. each within an eight second period. The NOTE: Not available in all markets, gearbox mode indicator displays A/M , see consult your McLaren Retailer. Gear Position Indicator, page 3.35. ✷ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➶ EAMLESS S HIFT G EARBOX

➜ ➞ ↕ ➡ ➛ ➠ ➜ ➙ ➞ ➤ ➛ ➔ ➣ ➢ ➟ ↕ ➛ ➙ ↔ ➔ ↔ ➙ ➞ ➞ ➔ ➔ ➓ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ NOTE: The single-piece paddle and To immediately shift to the lowest possible has elapsed without a manual gear central pivot enables upshifts and gear whilst the vehicle is moving, select and change being made, the gearbox will downshifts to be made using either hold a downshift on the paddle. The vehicle revert to automatic mode. paddle. will then go down through all gears As an alternative, upshifts can be made sequentially until the optimum gear is ❈ ➭ ❈ ✽ ✪ ✼ ✰ ✻ ✫ ✰ ✱ ✪ ❅ ❊ ✽ ✭ by pushing the left-hand paddle away reached or you release the paddle. from you and downshifts can be made When the vehicle speed is below 6 mph by pushing the right-hand paddle away (10 kph) or the vehicle is stationary with a from you. gear selected, select a downshift and hold the The gearshift paddles operate irrespective of paddle to select neutral. the handling and powertrain program If under 6mph (10 kph) you can also press the selected, and there is no need to release the neutral button on the tunnel to go into accelerator pedal to change gear. neutral. WARNING: For safety, in manual mode only, the vehicle will monitor engine speed and may perform an automatic gear change if necessary. WARNING: Do not change down for additional engine braking on a ✔ ✒ ✌ ✤ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✍ ✤ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✟ ✑ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✌ ✦ ✓ ✓ ✥ ✑ ✒ ✔ ❚ ❋ ❑ ✳ ➩ ❑ ♠ ❑ you. To downshift pull the left-hand paddle slippery surface. towards you. The current gear position NOTE: If operating the paddles in appears in the gear position display, see Gear automatic mode, the gearbox will revert Position Indicator, page 3.35. to automatic changes if an eight second period elapses without a gear change being made. ▲ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS ➈ ➇ ❾ ❮ ➸ ➁ ❾ ➆ ➁ ➂ ➄ ❮ ➸ ❮ ➀ ❰ ❾ ❿ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➃ ➁ ➂ ➇ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➻ Active dynamics control Active button ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✍ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✤ ✟ ✟ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✑ ✡ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ ❑ ❋ switches, on the active dynamics panel, allow 3. Active button, page 2.24 the driver to change the handling and 4. Eco Start-Stop system, page 2.12 performance characteristics of the vehicle. 5. Launch control, page 2.29 The active dynamics panel contains the 6. Handling control, page 2.25 following controls, and will only function with Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34 the engine running or the ignition switched on. ☛ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✳ ACTIVE button switches on the active dynamics panel. This activates the launch, handling and powertrain controls. The ACTIVE button and handling and powertrain switches will illuminate. NOTE: When the active dynamics panel is on, the current handling and powertrain modes will appear in orange 1. Engine START/STOP button, see on the instrument cluster. When the Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2 panel is off, the handling and powertrain 2. Powertrain control, page 2.27 modes will appear in white. Manual/Automatic mode, page 2.21 ❖ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS

Handling control ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✦ ✦ ✟ ✔ ✑ ✍ ✝ ✌ ✒ ✥ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ✳ ➲ ✃ ✃ ➞ ➜ ➛ ➔ ➢ ➤ ➔ ↕ ➣ ↕ ➙ ➞ ↕ ➣ ↕ ➙ ➟ ↕ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➒ ➙ ➑ ➛ ➐ ➢ ➏ ➎ the controls on the active dynamics following vehicle characteristics: panel will also switch off. The handling • Adaptive damping and powertrain control settings will be • ESC settings remembered but it will be necessary to press the ACTIVE button again to ➴ ❀ ❈ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✻ ✪ ✼ ✻ ✸ ✱ ✪ ✪ ✻ ✽ operate the controls when the ignition is next switched on or the vehicle will revert to automatic gear changes.

2. Rotate the handling control to select one of the following settings. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✗ ✔ ✡ ✠ ACTIVE button to switch on the active dynamics panel. ❫ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS

Settings The mode selected will remain active, until the selection is changed, the ignition is Suspension at its softest switched off, or the active dynamics panel is setting, offers a compliant deactivated. N Normal ride while maintaining good NOTE: If all the following conditions are body control through corners. not met when the selection is made, the Suspension is stiffer, giving a mode will not be implemented until they firmer ride coupled with are met: S Sport enhanced handling • no fault conditions existing characteristics. • no vehicle dynamic or stability The suspension is at its interventions activated, e.g. Electronic stiffest, giving almost race car Stability Control; handling and ride • steering wheel in straight ahead T Track characteristics. position, and not being turned, if the car The Electronic Stability is moving Control warning light is When the active dynamics panel is off, the permanently illuminated. Handling display in the right-hand display will show Normal, see Handling and Powertrain ➬ ➯ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➙ ➞ ↔ ➝ ➜ ➠ ➛ ➔ ↕ ➜ ➙ ➡ ➞ ↕ ➞ ➣ ✃ ↔ ➙ ↕ ➛ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ instrument cluster will change Display, page 3.35. dependent on the handling mode NOTE: In Track handling mode, the selected. See Handling and Powertrain Electronic Stability Control system is still Display, page 3.35. in operation. For further information, see Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34. ❢ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS

Powertrain control ➴ ❀ ❈ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✻ ✪ ✼ ✻ ✸ ✱ ✪ ✪ ✻ ✽ ➴ ✽ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✻ ✻ ✪

Gear changes are configured to offer the optimum

✍ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ❲ ❲ economy without sacrificing the vehicle!s inherent performance. Gear changes will occur at a higher engine speed and with a reduced shift duration and S Sport are further enhanced with cylinder cut. See Cylinder cut, page 6.14. Gear change strategy is at its ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✗ ✔ ✡ ✠ ACTIVE button to switch on 2. Rotate the powertrain control to select sharpest. Changes occur the active dynamics panel. one of the following settings. instantly, according to throttle response and are further T Track enhanced with cylinder cut and inertia push. See Cylinder cut, page 6.14 and Inertia push, page 6.15. ❦ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS ➬ ➯ ✿ ❀ ✿ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➙ ➞ ↔ ➝ ➜ ➠ ➛ ➔ ↕ ➜ ➙ ➡ ➞ ↕ ➞ ➣ ✃ ↔ ➙ ↕ ➛ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ ✬ ➳ ✸ ✬ ✮ ✪ ✰ ✬ Depending on the current active shift instrument cluster will change strategy, the word "NORMAL!, "SPORT! or dependent on the powertrain mode "TRACK! changes color to green when selected. See Handling and Powertrain economy mode is active. For information on Display, page 3.35. other ways to save fuel, see Economical The different gear change strategies outlined driving, page 2.14. above are only relevant with automatic mode NOTE: When the active dynamics panel selected. is on, the current handling and The mode selected will remain active, until powertrain modes will appear in orange the selection is changed, the ignition is on the instrument cluster. When the switched off, or the active dynamics panel is panel is off, the handling and powertrain deactivated. modes will appear in white. When the active dynamics panel is off, the Powertrain display in the right-hand display ☛ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✒ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ will show Normal, see✴ ✳ ❑ Handling and Powertrain Display, page 3.35. powertrain setting with automatic gear shifts NOTE: The use of the Track setting on selected, the transmission adapts to an the public road is not recommended. economical shift strategy during periods of The Track setting is strictly intended for gentle driving. This is determined by the high performance track/off road use vehicle speed, acceleration, braking and road only. gradient. ❧ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS

Launch control ✡ ✑ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✦ ✦ ✒ ✒ ✌ ✤ ✥ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✑ ✝ ☛ ✓ ✟ ✞ ✳ ❈ ➭ ❀ ❃ ❀ ❀ NOTE: If there is a fault or the launch ✼ ✸ ✬ ✬ ✽ ✯ ✭ ✭ ✽ ❅ ✻ ✪ ✸ ✬ maximum acceleration from a standing start. procedure has not been followed ✥ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✗ ✔ ☛ ❳ ✳ ❋ ✳ WARNING: Do not initiate launch correctly, a warning message Launch ahead position. control unless on a track. Before mode unavailable - see Owners Manual 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your initiating launch control, ensure that will be shown in the left-hand display. left foot and select first gear. all doors, luggage compartment and Repeat the launch procedure, ensuring service cover are closed, and the that it is followed correctly. If the prevailing conditions are suitable for warning message remains, contact your performing maximum acceleration McLaren Retailer. maneuvers. NOTE: Launch mode is only available if NOTE: Launch control can be operated the following conditions are met: in either automatic or manual modes • both doors are closed and any handling or powertrain mode, • vehicle ride height normal and nose lift but only when the active dynamics panel function inactive is activated. • atmospheric altitude has no detrimental NOTE: The launch sequence can be effect with respect to engine aborted at any point by carrying out any performance of the following actions: • engine coolant at normal operating • applying the parking brake temperature 3. Press the ACTIVE button to switch on • pressing the ACTIVE button to switch off the active dynamics panel. the vehicle dynamics panel • or pressing the launch button to switch off launch control ➦ ✷ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

ANDLING A ND P OWERTRAIN C ONTROLS

NOTE: To abort launch control release 7. Launch control will operate if procedure the brake pedal before pressing the has been followed correctly until accelerator pedal or wait for aborted. approximately 100 seconds until launch NOTE: Whilst in launch control, the control is deactivated. The message vehicle will carry out automatic gear "Launch Aborted! will be shown in the shifts, and optimize traction. It will left-hand display. continue to do so until launch control is NOTE: The message "Launch Mode aborted. To abort launch control, release Active - Boost Building! will be shown in the accelerator pedal, apply the brake, or the left-hand display. Once sufficient operate one of the gearshift paddles. boost has been achieved, the message "Launch Mode Active - Boost Ready! will be shown in the left-hand display. 6. Release the brake pedal with your left ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✏ ✡ ✠ LAUNCH button. foot and the launch control system will NOTE: L will flash in the gearbox mode perform a launch start to give maximum indicator, see Manual/Automatic mode, acceleration. page 2.21 and "Launch Mode Active - Awaiting Throttle! will be shown in the NOTE: To abort launch control release left-hand display. the accelerator pedal or wait for 5. With your left foot remaining on the approximately 5-10 seconds until launch brake pedal, press and hold the control is deactivated. If the launch is accelerator pedal down fully with your aborted, release the accelerator pedal right foot, the engine speed will increase and then press again to drive away. The to 3,000 rpm. message "Launch Aborted! will be shown in the left-hand display. ➨ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS ➈ ➾ ➀ ➸ ➈ ➽ ➈ ➽ ➸ ➀ ➼ ➄ ➈ ➃ ➁ ➂ ➂ ❮ ➅ General Anti-lock Braking System ✡ ✝ ✑ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✍ ✔ ☛ ☛ ❬ ✥ ✌ ☞ ☛ ✧ ❙ ✡ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✌ ✑ ✔ ✡ ❚ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✓ ☛ ✒ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ ➩ ✵ ✵ ✳ ✴ ❑ ❍ NOTE: In winter conditions, the following safety systems: maximum effect of the Anti-lock Braking wheels from locking when you brake. This • Anti-lock Braking System System, brake assist system and allows the vehicle to be steered during Electronic Stability Control can only be braking maneuvers. • Brake assist system achieved if you use winter tires, with • Brake disc wiping The Anti-lock Braking System works from a snow socks where they are necessary. speed of approximately 5 mph (8 kph) • Hill hold upwards, regardless of road surface • Brake-steer conditions. It works on slippery surfaces, even • Electronic brake pre-fill when you brake gently. • Electronic Stability Control WARNING: Do not depress the brake WARNING: The risk of an accident pedal repeatedly in quick succession increases when driving quickly, (pumping). Depress the brake pedal especially when cornering, on wet firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake and icy roads. Always maintain a safe pedal reduces the braking effect. distance to the vehicle in front. If the Anti-lock Braking System operates The driving safety systems described during braking, the warning light flashes, and in this section are unable to override the brake pedal pulses as this happens. the laws of physics. When the Anti-lock Braking System is Always adapt your driving style to activated, maintain the force on the brake suit the road and weather conditions pedal until the braking situation is over. and maintain a sufficient distance WARNING: Always adapt your driving from other road users and objects on style to suit the prevailing road and the road. weather conditions and maintain sufficient distance from other road users and objects on the road. ♥ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS

Brake assist system Brake disc wiping ✝ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✠ ✧ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✟ ✟ ✠ ❬ ✡ ✝ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✠ ✥ ❬ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✒ Anti-lock Braking System status✴ ✳ light ❑ ✴ ✵ ❋ ✵ ❑ ✳ ❑ erates automatically

✡ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✒ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✝ ☛ ✓ ✦ ✍ ✟ ✧ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ❄ braking situations. If you depress the brake when the windscreen wipers are switched on. ❋ system, the status light will illuminate. pedal quickly, the brake assist system It prevents moisture build up on the brake Do not drive your vehicle, contact your automatically increases the force applied to discs during periods of heavy rain, improving McLaren Retailer as soon as possible. the brakes and thus shortens the stopping braking performance. distance. WARNING: If the Anti-lock Braking System malfunctions, brake assist Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly system and Electronic Stability until the emergency situation is over, the Control are also deactivated. Anti-lock Braking System prevents the wheels from locking. If the Anti-lock Braking System malfunctions, the wheels could lock When you release the brake pedal, the brakes when you brake. This may increase will work as normal. Brake assist system is the stopping distance and impair your deactivated. ability to steer. WARNING: If the brake assist system malfunctions, the brakes will still operate. However, the braking force is not automatically boosted and this may increase the stopping distance. ✷ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS

Hill hold control Brake-steer Electronic brake pre-fill ✡ ✓ ➥ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✡ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✦ ✦ ✒ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✠ ❬ ✡ ✤ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✡ ☛ ✠ ✡ ✤ ✤ ✓ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✠ ✟ ✤ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✝ ✝ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ❄ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✍ ✒ ✑ ✒ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✥ ✍ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✠ ✦ ✍ ❄ ✡ ✟ ✤ ✡ ❍ ✵ ♠ ✴ ❑ ❑ ❍ ❑ ✵ ❑ vehicle on a hill, this function will continue to vectoring differential, but is integrated into the electronic brake pre-fill function apply the brakes for two seconds after the the braking system reducing weight and immediately brings the brake pads into pedal is released to assist a smooth start. providing excellent speed of response. contact with the discs, ensuring rapid braking. Torque vectoring gives the differential the ability to change the amount of power that is sent to each of the rear wheels to provide optimum stability and traction. If the system detects that the car is starting to understeer through a corner, the inside rear brake is gently applied. This helps to increase the yaw rate of the car, making the car feel more resistant to understeer. The lateral "g! force is also increased giving better handling characteristics. If the driver uses too much throttle exiting a corner, the inside rear wheel increases speed, which without brake steer could cause the car to become unstable. In this situation, brake steer will again gently apply the brake on the inside rear wheel, thereby restoring traction and stability. ▲ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS

Electronic Stability Control ☛ ✥ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✧ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✍ ✔ ✒ ✥ ✝ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ❳ ✳ ❍ ✴ ✿ ❡ ❀ ❀ ❈ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✮ ✽ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✸ ✻ ✬ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✬ WARNING: Do not deactivate

✡ ✍ ✌ ✌ ✠ ✟ ☛ ✠ ✥ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✌ ✔ ✒ stability✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ and✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✟ traction✠ ✌ ✡ ✑ ❚ between the tires and ✳ ❑ ✴ Electronic Stability Control unless on the road surface. of Electronic Stability Control. a track and prevailing conditions are suitable. Electronic stability control detects when a The traction control system reduces engine wheel starts to spin or the vehicle starts to torque to prevent the wheels from spinning. If NOTE: When you deactivate Electronic skid and stabilizes the vehicle by braking additional intervention is required to stop the Stability Control, the following individual wheels, and/or limiting the engine wheels from spinning, the vehicle will apply conditions result: power output. This also assists when pulling the rear brakes individually. The traction • the "ESC OFF! warning light illuminates away on wet or slippery road surfaces and control system brakes individual drive wheels • stabilizes the vehicle when braking. to prevent them from spinning. This means the light on the ESC OFF button illuminates NOTE: Electronic stability control only that the vehicle can accelerate on slippery functions properly if wheels with the surfaces. • Electronic Stability Control no longer recommended specification tires are WARNING: The traction control improves driving stability used. system cannot reduce the risk of an • the engine!s torque is no longer limited Electronic stability control is activated accident if you drive too fast. The and the drive wheels could spin automatically as soon as the engine is traction control system is unable to • the anti-lock braking system remains running. override the laws of physics. activated WARNING: If the electronic stability ➴ ❀ ❈ ❀ ❀ ❈ ❈ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✻ ✸ ✬ ✺ ✮ ✻ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✼ ✱ ✸ ✪ ❤ ✼ ✬ ✭ ➳ ✻ ✹ ✲ ✪ ✱ ✸ ✻ ✱ ✶ ✻ control warning illuminates, do not ➴ ❀ ❈ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❵ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✮ ✻ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✼ ✱ ✸ ✪ ❤ ✼ ✬ ✭ ➳ ✻ ✸ ❊ ✪ ❅ deactivate Electronic Stability Control is deactivated, the risk of the Control. Adapt your driving style to vehicle skidding is increased. Adapt suit road and traffic conditions. your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions. ❖ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS ✿ ✿ ❈ ❀ ➭ ➴ ➴ ➫ ✸ ✪ ✮ ✰ ✱ ✰ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✬ Dynamic ESC modes ➳ ✺ ✫ ✫ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✒ ✍ ❙ ✥ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ❳ ✦ ✒ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❁ ❍ ✴ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✧ ☛ ✟ ✑ ❙ ✌ ✠ ✌ ✒ ✝ ✗ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✧ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✠ ✑ ❚ ✠ ✒ ❙ ✌ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✒ ✗ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ✳ ❑ ✳ ✵ ❑ adjusted to various dynamic modes to suit The Electronic Stability Control is ON by 2. If not already in a dynamic ESC mode, the driver!s requirements and is dependent default. press the ESC OFF button briefly to on the handling mode currently active. 2. Press the ESC OFF button briefly to activate a dynamic ESC mode. Electronic Stability Control dynamic modes activate Sport Dynamic mode which 3. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for can be selected at any vehicle speed. allows more dynamic freedom over the 2 seconds, followed by a confirmation Ensure Sport or Track handling mode is default ESC ON mode. press again within 5 seconds to active, see Handling control, page 2.25. ESC DYN will be displayed on the deactivate the Electronic Stability instrument cluster. Control. ESC OFF will be displayed on the ✿ ✿ ❈ ❡ ❀ ❀ ❈ ✸ ✪ ✮ ✰ ✱ ✰ ✭ ✬ ❥ instrument cluster and the light on the ✡ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✧ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✠ ✑ ❚ ✌ ✝ ✗ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ✳ ✵ ESC OFF button will illuminate. The Electronic Stability Control is ON by default, but allows slightly increased wheel slip during acceleration over the default ESC ON condition in Normal and Sport handling modes. 2. Press the ESC OFF button briefly to activate Track Dynamic mode which allows a further increase in dynamic freedom over Sport Dynamic mode. ESC DYN will be displayed on the instrument cluster. ❫ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS ❜ ❀ ❈ ❈ ❀ Reactivating Electronic Stability Control ✪ ✸ ✲ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✬ ✻ ✱ ✯ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✰ ✪ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✒ ✍ ❙ ✥ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ❳ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ ❁ ❍ ✴ reactivated, the Electronic Stability Control OFF warning light in the instrument cluster extinguishes. NOTE: Electronic Stability Control is automatically reactivated when the ignition is next switched off and on again. ✡ ✌ ✟ ◆ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✒ ✍ ✟ ✍ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✥ ✦ ✒ ✡ ✌ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✠ ✡ ❋ ✳ ✴ Electronic Stability Control: • Press the ESC OFF button briefly, the light on the button will be extinguished. • Change the setting on the handling control to Normal. • Switch the ignition off and then switch on again. ❢ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ☛ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✧ ✡ ✥ ◆ ✌ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✠ ♠ ✴ WARNING: Never ignore a tire The system monitors the tire pressures and each tire should be checked when cold and pressure warning. Check tire temperatures in each wheel using sensors inflated/deflated to the inflation pressure pressures immediately and if located in each tire valve and a receiver recommended by the vehicle manufacturer necessary contact your McLaren located within the vehicle. Communication on the vehicle placard or tire inflation retailer. between the sensors and the receiver is via pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a Radio Frequency (RF) signals. ✿ ➴ ❂ ❡ different size than the size indicated ❣ on✪ ✱ ✲ the✪ ✭ ✹ ✻ ✪ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✲ ✭ ✮ ✬ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✱ ✯ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✬ ✭ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, System can suffer interference if you are you should determine the proper inflation operating radio transmitting equipment pressure for those tires). (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) In certain circumstances it is possible that the in or near the vehicle. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring pressure warning will display without the loss System will begin transmitting once the of air from the tire. This may be due to vehicle is traveling over 6mph (10kph), temperature variations between the locations there will be a delay of up to 40 seconds where the tire pressure was set and where the before this information is displayed on vehicle is driven. For example setting screen. pressures in an air conditioned or heated ✿ ➴ ❂ ❡

garage and then driving the vehicle outside ✪ ✹ ✻ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✭ ✮ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✱ ✯ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✬ ✭ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ may induce a tire pressure warning after a operation short period of driving. The warning may also ✤ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✓ ✍ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✦ ✌ ✡ ❄ ✠ ♠ ❋ ❑ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✧ ✒ ❙ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✥ ✌ ☛ ☛ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✟ ▼ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✥ ❚ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ ✴ ❋ display when extreme ambient temperature you when the pressure drops or the Tire Pressure Monitoring System variations occur or during seasonal temperature increases above an acceptable warning light will illuminate along with an temperature changes. level in one or more of the tires. associated error message in the left-hand display. ❦ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS ✝ ✥ ✔ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✟ ✍ ✔ ✑ ✟ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✒ ✒ ✔ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✒ ✌ ✡ ❙ ✑ ✌ ❍ ✵ ❑ ♠ ❑ manually checking tire pressures or your tires and inflate them to the checking for wear and damage. The recommended pressure, see Tire pressures, system only provides a low tire page 5.35. The warning light will be pressure warning and does not re- extinguished once the tires have been inflate the tires. inflated to the correct pressure. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire cannot alert you to damage to a tire. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to Regularly check the condition of your tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel tires. efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect WARNING: If low pressure warnings the vehicle!s handling and stopping ability. occur frequently, have the tires WARNING: TPMS is not a substitute checked at your McLaren Retailer. for proper tire maintenance, and it is Driving on an under-inflated tire will the driver!s responsibility to maintain The display shows the pressures of each of causes the tire to overheat and can correct tire pressure, even if under- the four tires. If the pressure figure appears in lead to tire failure. inflation has not reached the level to green, no action is required. If it appears as ENVIRONMENTAL: Under-inflated tires trigger illumination of the TPMS low red text, inflate the associated tire to the reduce fuel efficiency and tire tread life, tire pressure warning light. correct pressure as soon as possible. and may affect the vehicle!s handling Each tire should be checked weekly when Inspect the tire(s) for any possible causes of and braking characteristics. cold and inflated/deflated to the inflation reduced tire pressure. pressure recommended on the tire inflation ENVIRONMENTAL: Check tire pressures WARNING: The tire pressures at least every 7 days. pressure label. indicated in the left-hand display will Navigate through the "Vehicle Info! screen in be more accurate with a pressure the left-hand display to view the current tire gauge. The Tire Pressure Monitoring pressures, see Vehicle Info, page 3.9. System is not a substitute for ❧ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RIVING S AFETY S YSTEMS

Tire Temperature Monitoring System temperature appears in green, no action is operation required. If it appears in red, the safe ✡ ✠ ✥ ❚ ✤ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✥ ✌ ✑ ✑ ✟ ✦ ❄ ♠ ❑ ✳ operating temperature of the tires has been Temperature Monitoring System will display exceeded. Reduce speed or stop the vehicle an error message in the left-hand display. until the temperatures are at a safe level, i.e. temperatures are displayed in green. Navigate through the "Vehicle Info! screen in the left-hand display to view the current tire Inspect the tire(s) for any possible causes of temperatures, see Vehicle Info, page 3.9. increased tire temperature.

This shows the current temperature of each of the four tires. If the temperature appears in blue, the tires have not yet warmed up to optimum operating temperature. If the ➦ ▲ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RUISE C ONTROL ➇ ❾ ❮ ➸ ➁ ❾ ➆ ➀ ➈ ➂ ❮ ➆ Overview Using cruise control ❝ ❈ ✾ ❝ ❈ ❀ ❈ ❞ ➭ ❜ ❛ ❈ ❵ ✬ ✻ ✸ ✬ ✱ ❊ ✱ ✮ ✼ ✻ ✻ ✭ ✯ ✸ ✭ ✪ ✻ ✻ road and traffic conditions, when cruise control is activated, and always travel at a speed which is safe for the current conditions. Never use cruise control on winding or slippery roads or when visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or snow. Cruise control allows the driver to maintain a constant speed without using the accelerator pedal. This is useful on motorway journeys where a constant speed can be maintained for long periods. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✑ ☛ ✔ ✟ ✓ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✝ ✝ ☞ All cruise control functions❑ ❑ are operated by the cruise control stalk, positioned on the stalk up briefly, to activate cruise control. The right of the steering column. set speed will appear on the right-hand side of the central display. NOTE: Cruise control will only operate at speeds in excess of 20 mph (30 kph). Speed can be increased at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released the vehicle will return to the cruise speed. ➨ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RUISE C ONTROL

Canceling cruise control ❝ ✾ ❛ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❈ ❛ ❈ ❈ ❵ ❊ ✪ ❣ ❤ ✼ ❅ ✽ ❣ ✻ ✮ ✻ ✪ ✭ NOTE: Cruise control is canceled cruise is engaged and do not override automatically if Electronic Stability cruise for extended periods. Control detects wheel spin or vehicle Releasing the accelerator in these skid or if Electronic Stability Control is circumstances could lead to the switched off. vehicle not decelerating at the rate you expect. ✍ ✟ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✍ ✟ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✓ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✥ ✠ ❬ ✵ ❋ ✴ ❑ ✴ from you. Cruise control is canceled. The indicator in the instrument cluster extinguishes but the last speed set remains stored. NOTE: The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Cruise control is also canceled if the foot brake is pressed, if neutral is selected or if Active Speed Limiter is selected. ♥ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RUISE C ONTROL

Increasing cruise speed Reducing cruise speed NOTE: If you decelerate using the cruise control stalk, the gearbox may shift down to increase the rate of deceleration. Downshifting manually using the gear change paddles will not disengage cruise control.

A brief press of the stalk upwards will A brief press of the stalk downwards will increase the vehicle speed in 1 mph decrease the vehicle speed in 1 mph (1 kph) increments (depending on the (1 kph) decrements (depending on the units selected, see Units, page 3.16); units selected, see Units, page 3.16); • or press and hold the stalk upwards until • or press and hold the stalk downwards, the desired speed is reached, then the vehicle will decelerate, release the release the stalk; stalk when the desired speed has been • or accelerate to the new desired speed reached. and push the stalk up. ✷ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

RUISE C ONTROL

Resuming a stored speed ✿ ❝ ✾ ➫ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✰ ✪ ✭ ✬ ✻ ✽ ✪ ✯ ❅ ✽ ✻ ✪ ✭ ✪ ❊ ✮ ✼ ✸ speed if it is appropriate for the current road and traffic conditions. Sudden acceleration could endanger yourself and others.

Pull the cruise control stalk briefly towards you. Cruise control will adjust the vehicle!s speed to the last speed stored. ▲ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

➵ CTIVE S PEED L IMITER ( ASL) ➇ ➈ ➄ ❮ ➀ ➸ ➂ ➾ ➂ ➇ ➅ ➀ ➀ ❿ ➈ ➀ ➂ ➸ ➆ ➄ Setting an upper speed limit ❝ ✾ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✭ ✪ ✽ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✰ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✽ ✱ ❊ ✻ ➴ ❀ ❈ ➭ ✹ ✪ ✼ ✸ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✰ ✽ ✪ ✪ responsibility to keep within proper speed limits. WARNING: The ASL feature may allow the vehicle to exceed the upper speed limit in certain situations, for example when descending steep gradients. NOTE: ASL can be activated when the car is stationary. The upper speed limit will be set to a default speed of 20 mph (30 kph). The ASL control allows the driver to set an upper speed limit. ✡ ✔ ✥ ✓ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✓ ✔ ✔ ✗ ✡ ✠ ❍ 4. The upper speed limit appears on the control stalk, to select ASL mode. right-hand side of the central display. 2. Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the maximum permitted speed. 3. Push the stalk up briefly to select the desired ASL upper speed limit. ❖ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

UNNING I N ➁ ➂ ➃ ➁ ➂ ➁ ➁ ❮ Running in Normal/Road use ✔ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✓ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✒ ☛ ☛ ✍ ✥ ✥ ✍ ☛ ✒ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✦ ✥ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ◗ ✠ ✡ ✔ ❋ ✳ ✳ ❍ After the 625 miles (1,000 km) running in Allow the engine to warm up before when the vehicle is new or if any of these period, you may gradually use the vehicle!s driving at high engine speeds and high components have been replaced. full performance. loads. Limit engine speed to 5,000 rpm until the engine reaches full operating NOTE: Failure to observe the engine and ❈ ● ❈ ✪ ✬ ✹ ✪ ❤ ✭ ✸ ✰ ✱ ✸ ✹ ✸ ➳ temperature. gearbox operating limits during the ✔ ✎ ✡ ✙ ✕ ✍ ✗ ✥ ❼ ✙ ✌ ✙ ✧ ✧ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✠ ✒ ➚ ➊ ✵ ♠ ➋ running in period may lead to premature • Avoid stopping the engine within • drive at varying road and engine speeds wear or damage. 2 minutes of high speed/high load • running. do not drive faster than the maximum NOTE: These running in instructions also • speed limit of the road, or 150 mph apply for the first 625 miles (1,000 km) Avoid idling the engine for more than 10 minutes. (240 kph) after the engine or transmission has • do not use your vehicle on a race track been replaced. • avoid heavy loads on the engine (driving ENVIRONMENTAL: This advice will assist at full throttle) in improving fuel economy and should • avoid driving at engine speeds less than be adopted as normal driving practice 2,000 rpm even after the running in period. • avoid running at constant speed and ❈ load for long periods ✽ ✭ ✪ ✩ ❥ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✍ ☛ ✤ ✥ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✥ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✓ ➥ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✔ ❲ ✡ • avoid using kickdown✳ ❍ ❍ ✵ ❋ • do not downshift for additional engine period. Avoid heavy braking situations for the braking first 625 miles (1,000 km). • avoid stopping the engine within 2 minutes of high speed and high load running • avoid idling the engine for more than 10 minutes ❫ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

UNNING I N

Track use ➤ ↔ ➡ ➣ ↔ ➙ ➞ ➛ ➝ ➤ ↕ ➢ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➛ ➔ → ➣ ➞ ➒ ➙ ➑ ➞ ➐ ➏ ➎ during the running in period. Before you use your vehicle on the track, consult your McLaren Retailer. McLaren recommend that your vehicle is inspected before and after track use. ❢ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

EFUELLING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➇ ➇ ➀ ➼ ➀ ❮ Filling with fuel ❈ ✿ ✿ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ♦ ✪ ✼ ❤ ✼ ✫ ✮ ✼ ❅ ✹ ✱ ❅ ✽ ✱ ✼ ✪ ❊ ✯ ➉ ❈ ❈ ❈ ✸ ✻ ✹ ✬ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✹ ✽ ❅ ✸ ✻ ✱ ✼ ✻ ✼ ✱ ➉ 5. Do not continue to fill the tank after the Fire, naked flames, smoking and pump nozzle switches off. ☛ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✗ ✦ ✒ ❙ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✥ ✳ ❋ using a cell phone are prohibited 6. Remove the nozzle. when handling fuels. Switch off the 7. Close the fuel filler flap, you will hear the engine before refuelling. latch engage. WARNING: Fuel and fuel vapors can damage your health. Do not inhale fuel vapors or allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. The fuel filler flap is located at the rear on the left-hand side. It is locked or unlocked automatically when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. NOTE: Do not attempt to force the filler flap open if the car is locked. You may damage the flap and its locking 2. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap, mechanism. the latch will release. NOTE: The fuel filler flap will remain 3. Open the flap. locked if the engine is running. NOTE: Your vehicle is not fitted with a fuel filler cap. 4. Insert the nozzle into the fuel filler and dispense fuel. For fuel recommendations, see Recommended fuel, page 2.49. ❦ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

EFUELLING

Filling with the fuel funnel WARNING: Take care to avoid spillages and overfilling. Ensure any ➮ ➬ ➝ ➛ ➙ ➞ ➜ ➝ → ➞ ➢ ➔ ➝ ➛ ➙ ➙ → ✃ ➝ ➛ → ✃ ➛ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ used when filling the fuel tank from spillages are cleaned immediately. sources other than a gas station fuel 8. Remove the nozzle. pump. 9. Remove the fuel funnel, clean 1. Switch off the engine. thoroughly and store in the luggage compartment. 10. Close the fuel filler flap, you will hear the latch engage.

4. Collect the fuel funnel from the luggage compartment, see Fuel funnel, page 5.12. 5. Insert the fuel funnel fully into the filler neck. 6. Insert the nozzle into the fuel funnel and dispense fuel. For fuel 2. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap, recommendations, see Recommended the latch will release. fuel, page 2.49. 3. Open the flap. 7. Do not overfill. NOTE: Your vehicle is not fitted with a fuel filler cap. ❧ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

EFUELLING

Recommended fuel ➲ ➛ ➙ ↕ ➝ ➞ ➔ ↔ ➟ ➣ ↔ ➢ ➣ ↔ ➝ ➔ ➝ ➛ ➛ ↔ ➡ ➡ ➡ ↕ ➛ → ➒ ➜ ➑ ➛ ➐ ➏ ➎ No use of methanol is allowed. In areas where octane ratings can be posted on the 94 AKI rated fuel is unavailable, use unleaded pumps. The octane rating shown is an premium grade gasoline with a minimum average of Research Octane Number octane rating of 91 AKI. Fuel with an ethanol (RON) and Motor Octane Number (MON) content up to E10 maximum is permitted. rating. NOTE: This vehicle is not suitable for use For maximum engine performance the use of with fuels containing more than 10% 94 AKI rated fuel is recommended. Ethanol. In areas where 94 AKI rated fuel is unavailable, Do not use E85 fuels (85% Ethanol use unleaded premium grade gasoline with a content). This vehicle is not fitted with minimum octane rating specification. the equipment necessary for the use of NOTE: Information relating to the quality fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol. of fuel being dispensed is displayed on If E85 fuels are used, serious damage will the filling pump. occur to the engine and fuel system. NOTE: The likelihood of engine wear or NOTE: If the fuel tank is accidentally damage is increased if fuel does not filled with the incorrect type of fuel, do meet the requirements of EN 228 for not start the engine, and seek qualified unleaded gasoline or if fuel additives are assistance. used. Damage caused by use of incorrect fuel is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use leaded fuel, doing so may damage the catalytic converter. ➦ ❖ ♦ ✷ DRIVING C ONTROLS

INTER D RIVING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➂ ❮ ➅ ❮ ➀ ➸ ➁ ➂ ❰ Winter driving ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✠ ◆ ✓ ✟ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✌ ❄ ✴ ✴ ❀ ➴ NOTE: Only winter tires specified by ✬ ✽ ✽ ❥ ❣ ✬ ✸

inspected at your McLaren Retailer at the ✡ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ McLaren✴ ✴ should be used. onset of winter. This service includes the WARNING: Replace winter tires with a snow socks which have been approved for following: tread depth of less than 4 mm McLaren vehicles. If you are intending to fit • checking the antifreeze/anti-corrosion immediately. They are not suitable for snow socks, bear the following points in mind: concentration winter use because they do not • Only ever fit snow socks to both rear • adding concentrated cleaning agent to provide sufficient grip, and could wheels. the windscreen cleaning system cause an accident. • Comply with the manufacturer!s • checking the battery NOTE: A wheel change must be carried installation instructions. • changing the tires out at your McLaren Retailer. The vehicle Do not exceed the maximum permissible could be damaged if it is jacked up speed of 30 mph (50 kph). Remove the snow ❵ ✽ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✻ ✭ ✪ ✻ ✸ ✱ incorrectly. socks as soon as possible if you are no longer ✒ ☛ ✔ ✔ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✍ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✤ ✏ ✠ ✡ ☛ ✡ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✘ ❪ ☛ ✥ ❋ ❍ ❋ ➊ ➚ ❁ ❋ ➋ Consult your McLaren Retailer for advice and driving on snow-covered roads. or ice-covered roads. The maximum effect of information regarding the maximum speed the Anti-lock Braking System and Electronic specified for the winter tires fitted. Restrict Stability Control systems is only achieved with the maximum speed of the vehicle using the these tires. ASL system, see Setting an upper speed limit, Use winter tires of the same make and tread page 2.44. on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Change the tire type in "Vehicle Settings! in the left-hand display, see Tire Type, page 3.25. Winter tires are directional, not asymmetrical, and so must be fitted in accordance with the directional markings on the sides of the tires. ➨ ❫ ♦ ✷

♥

♦

▲

❼

✏ 7

✎

✚

✚ ✚

3.36

...... 3.7 ...... 3.3 ...... 3.8

...... 3.2

...... 3.9

...... 3.28

...... 3.27

...... 3.12

...... 3.16

...... 3.35

...... 3.27

...... 3.3

...... 3.

......

④

⑨

④

⑨

❺

③

✉

⑨

✡

③

✠ ✉

⑩

❋

❺

✓

✒

⑩

③

✌

✉ ⑩

✤

✟

✠

⑩

☛

⑩

✥

✡

⑨

❑

❯ ❋ ❋

✡ ✡

✇

✴

✥ ✥ ✧

✈

✟

◆ ◆

✇

✡

✍

⑥

✠ ✠

✈

❚

❑

✡ ✡

✍

✔

✇

✥ ◆ ◆

✥

② ⑦

Speedometer ...... Vehicle Info ...... Trip Computer...... Fuel Range and Level ...... Nose Lift ...... Settings...... Tachometer ...... Home Screen...... Indicator...... Position Gear Water Temperature...... Electronic Stability Control Mode Display...... Mode Control Stability Electronic Handling Powertrain Display and ...... Navigation...... McLaren Track Telemetry Track McLaren ...... Messages......

◗ ❉ ◗ ◗

✉

① ① N

I OVERVIEW ⑨ ❶ ⑥ INSTRUMENTS

❽ VERVIEW ❰ ➀ ➂ ❮ ➀ ❾ Overview Tachometer ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✑ ◆ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✠ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ NOTE: The maximum RPM is dynamic ignition is switched on, see Switching on the and will be reduced under certain ignition, page 2.3. conditions, for example, if the engine oil WARNING: No messages will appear in is below normal operating temperature the instrument screen if there is a or if neutral gear is selected. fault with the screen or vehicle NOTE: Do not operate the engine at or electrics. Contact your McLaren near its maximum speed for a significant Retailer immediately. Use of the length of time. The fuel supply is cut off vehicle in these circumstances can to protect the engine when the be dangerous. maximum RPM is reached. ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✔ ✠ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✒ ✑ ✝ ✟ ✌ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ✴ ❑ ❑ of the instrument cluster screen when in Normal Powertrain and Handling modes. The red number in the display indicates the engine!s maximum RPM. When Sport or Track Powertrain or Handling modes are selected, the tachometer style will change to suite the selected mode. See Display Window, page 3.32. ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

❽ VERVIEW

Speedometer ✥ ✤ ✥ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✒ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ ❑ tal display situated centrally within the instrument cluster when in Normal Powertrain and Handling modes. When Sport or Track Powertrain or Handling modes are selected, the speedometer style will change to suite the selected mode. See Display Window, page 3.32. NOTE: The speedometer changes from mph to kph when the units are changed from miles to kilometers, see Units, page 3.16. ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ➽ ➄ ➇ ❿ ➈ ➂ ➅ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➻ ➺ ➸ ➼ ➀ ➇ Overview ✡ ✟ ✑ ✒ ☛ ✌ ✥ ✒ ✤ ✠ ✓ ☛ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✥ ✟ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✟ ❯ ❑ ➩ ❋ ❋ ❑ ❑ ❑ ✳ ❑ instrument screen. The stored messages can be viewed at any time when the ignition is on, see Error Messages, page 3.9. WARNING: Operating and browsing menus whilst the vehicle is in motion could make you unable to observe road and traffic conditions and could cause an accident. WARNING: Do not ignore warning messages, failure to take appropriate action may result in personal injury or Navigation through the menu structure is damage to the vehicle. achieved using the control stalk mounted on the left of the steering column. The following categories are available: ❖ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ☛ ✡ ✟ ✚ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✘ ✝ ❙ ✡ ✧ ✒ ❩ ✡ ✡ ❙ ✌ ✦ ✟ ✥ ✚ ✎ ✞ ✡ ✗ ✡ ✔ ✒ ❲ ✡ ✡ ❙ ✟ ✠ ✚ ✌ ✘ ✡ ✡ ✎ ✧ ✡ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✠ ❚ ❚ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✡ ✡ ❙ ❑ ♠ ✳ ❑ ♠ ✳ ❑ ♠ ✴ ✳ ✵

See Trip Computer, page 3.8 See Settings, page 3.16

See Vehicle Info, page 3.9 See Navigation, page 3.27 ❫ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

Ö EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Navigate through a category ✍ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✤ ✔ ✠ ✍ ☛ ✒ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✗ ◆ ✒ ▼ ✵ ❋ ❑ (SCROLL + or -) to highlight your choice. 2. Pull the stalk towards you (FORWARD) to enter your selection. 3. Then select the topic of interest from the list, move the control stalk up or down (SCROLL + or -) to highlight your choice. 4. Pull the stalk towards you (FORWARD) to move through to the next menu in the structure. 5. At the end of each structure there will be 6. When the function required is selected a display of information or a screen or a setting is made, press OK on the end where a setting can be changed. of the control stalk to confirm. A setting is only changed if the OK button is pressed. ❢ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Home Screen ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✍ ✓ ✒ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ☛ ✑ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✝ ✒ ❚ ✴ ✳ ➫ ✿ ❀ ✬ ✭ ✪ ✰ ✻ ✪ ✬ ✼ ✺ ❥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✍ ✟ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✌ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✒ ✤ ✒ ✡ ✑ ❚ Home screen, see Language,✡ ✠ ✒ ✧ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✧ ✥ page✌ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✠ 3.17.✠ ✓ ✝ ✝ ✔ ✒ ✡ ✥ ✍ ✟ ✑ ✤ ✝ ✍ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✑ ❚ ❑ ✴ ➋ ✵ ❑ ✴ details refer to Defaults, page 3.26. vehicle has traveled. ❡ ➭ ❈ ✿ ➭ ✪ ✭ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✯ ✻ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✮ ✪ ✸ ✭ ✯ ✬ ➭ ❈ ✿ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✤ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✑ ❚ ✪ ✭ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✯ ✻ ✻ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✫ ✱ ✸ ✪ ❊ ✲ ➳ ✳ ❑ ✴ displayed is above freezing point, the current journey. Refer to Trip Computer, road surface may still be icy. You page 3.8 for more details. should always adapt your driving ❡ ➭ style and speed to suit the weather ✱ ✭ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✑ ❚ conditions. ❑ ✴ trip meter was last reset. Refer to Trip Temperature is the current outside Computer, page 3.8 for more details. temperature. There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature is displayed. When the outside air temperature falls below The Home screen displays the following 37°F (3°C), the frost warning message will be functions: displayed and the temperature reading will change color after the message has been displayed. When the outside temperature falls below 32°F (0°C), the ice warning will be displayed. ❦ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Trip Computer ✥ ✠ ✠ ❚ ✒ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✟ ☛ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✧ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✓ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ✳ ❑ ❑ ❡ ➭ ❡ ➭ ✱ ✭ ✮ ✪ ✱ ✸ ✭ ✭ ✯ ✬ Journey Trip information. ✟ ✠ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✝ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✤ ✔ ✳ ✳ ❑ ♠ ❉ ❑ ✴ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✝ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✤ ✔ ✳ ✳ ❑ ♠ ❉ ❑ ✴ fuel consumption since the last trip reset. fuel consumption for the current journey. The hours displayed is the time that the The time displayed is the time that the engine engine has been running since the last trip has been running in the current journey. reset. Press the OK button on the end of the control Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk for 2 seconds to reset the information stalk for 2 seconds to reset the information back to zero. back to zero. The information will also reset to zero when the engine is switched off. ❧ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Vehicle Info ➫ ❣ ✪ ✱ ✲ ✭ ✪ ✲ ❀ ❈ ➴ ✾ ❂ ❈ ✲ ✱ ✭ ✲ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✼ ✻ ✪ ✸ ✭ ✽ ✽ ✬ ✪ ✽ ✭ ✭ ✹ ✪ ➳ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✧ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✤ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✧ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✒ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✦ ✒ ✑ ✡ ✝ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❋ ✳ ✔ ✎ ✡ ✍ ✥ ❼ ✠ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✤ ✔ ✍ ✙ ✡ ✌ ✚ ✟ ✟ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✧ ☞ ✥ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ✡ ☛ ✌ ◆ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✟ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✒ ☛ ✦ ❄ ➊ ✴ ✴ ❑ ❑ ❏ ✳ ✳ ♠ ❍ ✳ Vehicle info screen. (1,000 km) before a service is due, the above display will confirm this. • Service Interval, page 3.9 display appears. If any errors have been logged, the screen will • Error Messages, page 3.9 The message will then appear every time the display Error Messages with arrows to scroll • Tire Monitoring, page 3.10 ignition is switched on, with the through the messages. time/distance figures reducing. Once the • McLaren Track Telemetry, page 3.10 service has been carried out, the display will • Oil Status, page 3.10 be reset by your McLaren Retailer. • Battery Status, page 3.11 If a service becomes overdue, the display will • Vehicle Identification, page 3.11 show the distance it is overdue. ➦ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❈ ❡ ❃ ❀ ❀ ❈ ❂ ❡ ✿ ➫ ➴ ❈ Tire Monitoring ✸ ✪ ✭ ✭ ❥ ✪ ✮ ✼ ✭ ✪ ✻ ✪ ✼ ✱ ✽ ✻ ✯ ✻ ❨ ◗ ❚ ✠ ✠ ✡ ❪ ◗ ✒ ✑ ☞ ❨ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✒ ✔ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ ✍ ✥ ✒ ✦ ✒ ✔ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✟ ✍ ✟ ◆ ✒ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✓ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ➋ ➋ ❑ ❑ ❋ ♠ ❉ ❑ ✴ ✳ ❋ ✳ ✳ of each of the 4 tires. If the figures appear in With "AUTO! selected, a lap timer will be together with the oil temperature. green, no action is required. If they appear as displayed on the left-hand display when the To check the engine oil level, see Checking red text, have the tires inspected and McLaren Track Telemetry application has the engine oil, page 5.2. pressures rectified as soon as possible. been launched using IRIS. Inspect the tire(s) for any possible causes of Select "OFF! to disable the lap timer view. reduced pressure or increased temperature. See McLaren Track Telemetry, page 3.27. Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. ➨ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❈ ❀ ❀ ✾ Battery Status ✸ ✬ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✫ ✱ ✻ ✱ ✸ ✪ ❅ ✼ ✪ ✪ ✰ ❱ ✧ ✓ ✠ ☛ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✟ ✟ ✍ ✝ ✟ ✒ ✥ ✦ ✠ ✔ ✑ ✓ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✠ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✑ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✤ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✑ ✟ ✍ ✌ ✔ ❍ ❉ ❑ ✴ ❋ ✳ ✳ ✳ ✴ ✳ ❍ ❉ ❑ ✴ status. To charge the battery, see Charging the battery, page 5.13. ♥ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Nose Lift ➷ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➙ ↕ ➙ ➞ ➤ ↕ ➣ ✃ ↕ ➝ ➛ ➔ ➞ ➙ ➛ ➢ ➒ ➣ ➑ ✃ ➐ ➏ ➎ ❂ ❀ ❀ ❛ If the nose is left in a raised position for✪ a✯ ❅ ✻ ✸ long✪ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✽ ✽ ✪ right-hand side of the central display is period, a system reset may occur when the amber, or a vehicle lift fault message engine is next started to return the nose to appears on the instrument cluster, the normal ride height. system is not available. Do not drive the If nose lift is used when in motion, slight vehicle at high speed and contact your adjustments to the steering feel may be McLaren Retailer as soon as possible. experienced, this is normal and does not The Nose Lift menu displays the following affect the operation of the vehicle. Information: NOTE: Vehicle handling modes are • Nose Lift - Raise, page 3.13 inhibited when nose lift is lowering or • Nose Lift - Lower, page 3.14 raising. A confirmation tone will be heard when nose NOTE: Nose lift will be unavailable if lift is selected. launch mode is active. Nose lift gives you the option to raise or lower NOTE: If nose lift is requested while the ☛ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✓ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✌ ✦ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✝ ✝ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✓ ✒ ❴ ✳ engine has been stopped by the Eco the nose of the vehicle dependent on the menu control stalk on the left of the steering Start-Stop System, the engine will be current nose ride height. column, whenever the engine is running. automatically restarted. Nose ride height can only be raised when traveling at speeds below 50 kph (31 mph). The nose will automatically lower at speeds above 60 kph (37 mph). NOTE: The front suspension can be left fully raised for extended periods, but it may relax to a lower level over time. ✷ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ➯ ➛ ➡ ↔ ➔ ➟ ➛ ➙ ↕ ➝ ➜ ➜ ➞ ➙ ↔ ➢ ➛ ➝ ➤ ↕ ➢ ➛ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ inhibited when vehicle lift is lowering or raising. NOTE: Nose lift will be unavailable if launch mode is active. Hold the menu control stalk up for one second to quickly access the menu. A confirmation tone will be heard. The nose lift screen display will exit after the timeout duration has been exceeded back to home screen if there is no activity on the menu. To set the timeout to home screen duration, see Language, page 3.17. Before nose lift will become active, the engine The change in nose ride height is confirmed must be running. To raise the nose of the by an ascending audible tone. "Vehicle ❈ ❝ ❜ ❃ ➪ ✪ ✪ ✽ ✽ ✱ ✻ ✬ ✫ ✱ vehicle, select the nose lift menu (see Raising! appears in the left-hand side of the ➯ ➛ ➜ ↕ ➡ ➡ ➞ ➝ ➙ ↔ ➣ ↔ ➔ ↕ ➛ ➝ ➤ ↕ ➢ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➒ ➙ ➑ ➛ ➐ ➢ ➏ ➎ Accessing the Menu, page 3.12) and then central display and the nose lift icon will flash. height, you will only have the option to move the menu control stalk upwards. raise the front of the vehicle. If the engine is stopped while the vehicle is raising, the system will stop and continue to NOTE: Nose lift will be delayed if the raise only when the engine is restarted. vehicle experiences any excessive steering wheel input. To change from raise to lower, move the menu control stalk downwards. The nose of NOTE: Always check the nose lift icon on the vehicle will start to lower, and the the display before driving your vehicle. information displayed on the instrument cluster will confirm the change. ▲ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❝ ❃ ❃ ➪ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✍ ✥ ✍ ✟ ✓ ✠ ✦ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✽ ✻ ❣ ✬ ✫ ✬ ✱ ❍ ♠ ✴ confirmation tone is heard. "Ride Height: ➲ ➲ ➛ ➝ ➛ ➝ ➤ ↕ ↕ ➢ ➢ ➛ ✃ ➞ ➣ ➙ ➞ ➡ ✃ ➛ ➢ ➞ ➣ ➝ ➡ ➞ ➛ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ Raised! appears on the instrument screen and stationary, the engine must be running the nose lift icon is illuminated while the and the driver!s door must be fully vehicle remains raised. closed. If there is no further activity, the Vehicle raise NOTE: When the nose is raised, you will text display will exit after the timeout duration only have the option to lower the nose. has been exceeded. To set the timeout to home screen duration, see Language, NOTE: Do not drive at high speed whilst page 3.17. the nose is lowering. If the nose begins to auto lower, a descending audible tone is heard, and the nose lift menu will be displayed in the left-hand display allowing you control of the system. To lower the nose of the vehicle, select the NOTE: Always check the nose lift icon in nose lift menu (see Accessing the Menu, the right-hand display before driving page 3.12) and then move the menu control your vehicle. stalk downwards. The change in nose ride height is confirmed by a descending audible tone. "Vehicle Lowering! appears in the instrument display and the screen nose lift icon will flash. ❖ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

If there is no further activity, the Vehicle lower text display will exit after the timeout duration has been exceeded. To set the timeout to home screen duration, see Language, page 3.17. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✒ ✔ ✥ ✧ ✟ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✌ ✍ ✠ ✡ ✧ ✒ ☛ ✠ ✦ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✝ ✒ ❚ ♠ ❋ ✳ menu control stalk upwards. The nose will start to raise, and the information displayed on the instrument cluster will confirm the change. When the nose is lowered, an audible confirmation tone is heard. "Ride Height: Normal! appears in the instrument display and the nose lift icon extinguishes. ❫ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Settings ➫ ❣ ✪ ✱ ✲ ✭ ✪ ✲ ➭ ❈ ➴ ➪ ➭ ✽ ✱ ✶ ✼ ✮ ✻ ✪ ✯ ✽ ✻ ✱ ✸ ➍ ✒ ✍ ✍ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✟ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✓ ✡ ✒ ✠ ✝ ✔ ✔ ✌ ✥ ☛ ❪ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ◗ ❋ ✳ ✴ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✧ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✤ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✧ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✒ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✝ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❋ ✳ ✧ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✤ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✧ ✝ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✒ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✝ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✦ ✍ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❋ ✳ Settings screen: Display Setup: units of measurement. • Display Set-up, page 3.16 • Units, page 3.16 Distance - select miles or km. • Lighting, page 3.18 • Time & Date, page 3.17 Speed - select mph or kph. • • Vehicle, page 3.19 Language, page 3.17 Temperature - select °C or °F. • Defaults, page 3.26 Pressure - select kPa, Bar or PSI. Fuel Consumption - select mpg, km/Liter or Liters/100 km. ❢ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ✠ ✒ ✔ ☛ ✔ ❙ ✒ ☛ ❭ ✍ ❪ ✍ ✒ ✍ ❪ ✟ ✍ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✧ ✔ ✓ ✍ ✒ ❡ ❈ ✿ ❈ ❈ ❃ ♠ ✳ ✳ ➩ ✶ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✪ ✯ ✪ ✹ ✹ ✸ liters. The setting for your vehicle depends on the country or region where the vehicle was purchased. The units can be changed individually at any time. Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your selections. NOTE: This feature also sets the units for the trip computer. ☛ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✒ ✦ ✧ ✥ ✡ ❚ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✡ ❙ ✳ ❉ ❍ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✌ ✦ ✓ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✝ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ ❪ ❑ ✴ Press the OK button on the end of the control language. stalk to confirm your choice. The following choices are available: The time display can be set as 12 hour or • English (UK) 24 hour format. • English (US) • Arabic • Chinese • French • German • Italian ❦ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❃ ❈ ● ❃ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ Japanese ✹ ✸ ✸ ➳ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✪ ✼ ✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ • Russian • Spanish • Portuguese • Latin American Spanish • Polish • Korean • Thai • Turkish • Hungarian • Dutch Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✓ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✒ ✌ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✌ ❄ ✒ ❍ ❑ ✍ ✟ ☛ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✥ ☛ ✥ ✚ ✌ ❄ ✞ ✠ ✑ ✍ ✡ ✗ ✒ ✟ ☛ ❳ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ❑ ♠ ✳ ✳ ✳ ♠ ❻ ❏ If a language is not available on your vehicle, Lighting, page 3.19. external lights stay illuminated when locking "NOT SUPPORTED! will appear in the display. and unlocking the vehicle. Consult your McLaren Retailer for further assistance. Select the entry or exit lighting time from the instrument cluster screen, set the required time and press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your selection. ❧ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❀ Internal Lighting A gauge will appear. Move the control stalk up ✱ ✪ ❅ ✼ ✪ ❱ ✕ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✒ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✝ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✦ ✍ ✡ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✟ ✌ ✧ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✔ ✌ ❄ ✒ or down (SCROLL + or -) to❋ highlight✳ ✵ ❍ your❑ preferred brightness level. • Intake Sound Generator (ISG), page 3.20 Press the OK button on the end of the control • Valet Mode, page 3.22 stalk to confirm your choice. • Reverse Select Tone, page 3.23 Select courtesy lighting and pull the control • Performance Shift Cue (PSC), page 3.23 stalk towards you to toggle the option "ON! or • Navigation, page 3.23 "OFF!. • Auto Door Lock, page 3.23 Press the OK button on the end of the control • Auto Fold Mirrors, page 3.23 stalk to confirm your choice. • Auto Alarm, page 3.23 • Door Unlock, page 3.24 • Comfort Entry/Exit, page 3.24 • Start Button Pulse, page 3.24 ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✓ ✒ ❹ ✍ ✍ ✤ ✒ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✦ ✒ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ❋ ✳ • illumination level: Silent Lock, page 3.24 • Reverse Mirror Dip, page 3.24 • Switch Lighting • Tire Type, page 3.25 • Footwell Lighting • Wiper Modes, page 3.25 • Door Lighting • Wiper Sensitivity, page 3.26 Hold the control stalk down for one second to quickly access switch lighting. A confirmation tone will be heard. ➦ ♥ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Intake Sound Generator (ISG) Select the mode that you wish to change and Move the menu control stalk up or down ☛ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✔ ✦ ✒ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✡ ☛ ✑ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✓ ✒ ❴ ✳ ✳ a gauge showing the current ISG sound level (SCROLL + or -) to achieve your preferred the cabin for each powertrain mode selected. for that mode will appear. sound level for that powertrain mode. Press the OK button on the end of the menu WARNING: Operating and browsing control stalk to confirm your choice. menus whilst the vehicle is in motion could make you unable to observe The default settings for each mode are as road and traffic conditions and could follows: cause an accident.

Three different powertrain modes will be displayed in the ISG menu. ➨ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ➯ ➝ ➛ ➣ ➡ ➛ ➞ ➝ ➠ ➝ ➛ ➤ ➛ ➝ ↔ ➡ ➐ ➝ ➡ ➛ ➞ ➝ ↔ ➎ ➛ ➝ NOTE: These are the default settings for each mode, but you can apply any level of sound to any powertrain mode. ♥ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Valet Mode To enter the PIN, press the control stalk up or down until the first digit required appears in the display, then press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. An asterisk replaces each number as it is entered. Repeat the process to enter the full PIN.

For a 5 second period after entering Valet Mode, the PIN can be changed by entering a ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✤ ✔ ✡ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✤ ✒ ▼ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✍ ❯ ✟ ❑ ♠ is limited to 55 kph (35 mph), the active new PIN using the same procedure described dynamics panel is disabled, the luggage on this page. compartment and service tray access panels remain locked, and a confirmation message appears in the left-hand display. To switch on Valet Mode you must input a PIN The factory set PIN number is 0000 . Use this number after selecting the "Valet Mode! from PIN the first time to switch on Valet Mode. the Vehicle menu screen. You should change this PIN at the earliest opportunity. ✷ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❈ ❈ ❝ Reverse Select Tone ✸ ✹ ✱ ✬ ✱ ✲ ✻ Press the OK button on the end of the control ☛ ✟ ✔ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✒ ✔ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✤ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ❨ ☛ ❲ ✡ ◗ ✑ ❯ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✤ ✓ ✡ ✌ ✝ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ☛ ✔ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✑ ✥ ✥ ❨ ✟ ❯ ✍ ❲ ◗ ❋ ♠ ♠ ❉ ❑ ✴ stalk to confirm your choice. audible indication that reverse gear has been navigation turn-by-turn guidance will be ❂ ❛ selected. If "OFF! is selected, the tone will be displayed on the left-hand display if route ✽ ✰ ✭ ✼ ✬ ✬ ✭ ✭ ➉ ✱ ✬ ✻ ✯ ✔ ✠ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✠ ✥ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ❨ ☛ ❲ ✡ ◗ ✑ ❯ disabled. ❋ guidance❏ has been started using IRIS. See Navigation, page 3.27. fold as the vehicle is locked and unfold when Press the OK button on the end of the control the door is opened. If "OFF! is selected, the stalk to confirm your choice. If "Display OFF! is selected, the turn-by-turn mirrors will remain in their driving position. guidance on the left-hand display will be ➴ ❈ ✿ ❀ ➴ ✪ ✺ ✭ ✯ ✸ ✬ ✺ ✫ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✫ ✱ ✪ ❅ disabled. Press the OK button on the end of the control ✑ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✍ ✍ ✑ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✦ ✥ ✑ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✟ ☛ ❙ ✟ ✔ ✥ ❋ ❋ ♠ ❍ ❁ stalk to confirm your choice. Press the OK button on the end of the control sound during full throttle acceleration in ❛ ❛ ❈ ✿ stalk to confirm your choice. ✬ ✻ ✯ ✼ ✭ manual gearbox mode, to indicate that an ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✤ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✍ ☞ ✒ ✌ ✓ ☞ ✑ ✌ ✥ ❯ upshift is required to maintain optimum NOTE: This❋ option♠ has no effect on the performance. operation of the Navigation system on automatically lock and the alarm set if IRIS. unlocked and left for 30 seconds with all When "OFF! is selected, the PSC function will doors, luggage compartment lid and service be disabled. ❃ ❀ ❛ ✭ ✬ ✬ ✬ ✶ ❥ ✬ ✻ ✯ access panels left fully closed. ✝ ✒ ✍ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✤ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✝ ☞ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✒ ❯ When✵ "SPORT♠ AND TRACK! is selected,✴ PSC Press the OK button on the end of the control will be active in either Sport or Track will be set to on. stalk to confirm your choice. powertrain or handling modes. The vehicle doors will automatically lock as When "TRACK ONLY! is selected, PSC will only the vehicle moves off. be active in Track powertrain or handling Switch Auto Door Lock off, and the doors modes. remain unlocked after moving off, unless, Press the OK button on the end of the control they are locked manually. stalk to confirm your choice. ▲ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ➴ ❈ ➭ ❂ ❜ Door Unlock ✸ ✪ ✽ ✬ ✼ ✻ ✻ ✯ ✯ ✩ ✻ ✻ ✭ ✱ ✶ ✪ ✭ ✽ ✬ ✭ ✭ ✭ ✪ ✱ ✲ ✪ ✔ ❨ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✤ ✑ ☛ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✍ ❄ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✔ ❳ ✔ ❯ ✥ ❨ ✴ ♠ ❘ ❉ ❘ ✤ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ❨ ☛ ❲ ✡ ◗ ✑ ❯ ♠ START/STOP door will unlock when the vehicle is unlocked button illumination will pulse, when the with either the key fob or door button. vehicle is in Awake, Accessory or Ignition When "BOTH! is selected, both doors will status. See Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2. unlock when the vehicle is unlocked using If "OFF! is selected, the illumination pulse will either the key fob or door button. be disabled. All closures will lock with either "DRIVERS! or Press the OK button on the end of the control "BOTH! selected. stalk to confirm your choice. Press the OK button on the end of the control ❃ ➴ ❀ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✬ ✼ ✱ ❥ stalk to confirm your choice. ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✔ ☛ ☛ ✠ ✓ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ❨ ☛ ❲ ✡ ◗ ✑ ❯ ✳ disabled when locking or unlocking using the ● ✿ ➳ ✻ ✮ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✸ ➳ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✺ ✬ ✫ keyless entry system. ✔ ❨ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ❨ ✑ ✠ ✔ ✌ ✡ ❲ ✌ ✥ ➧ ☛ ✌ ◗ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✧ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ ♠ ✴ ❏ If "OFF! is selected, the turn signals always ❲ ❳ ❙ ❳ ❙ ✠ ☞ ❨ ✒ ❨ ❩ ✌ ❚ ✝ ◗ ◗ ✡ ✍ ❬ ❨ ✡ ❙ seat will move fully rearwards and to its lowest ♣ ❘ ➋ ➋ ♠ position when the ignition is off and the flash when the vehicle is locked or unlocked, irrespective of the method used. "OFF! - no mirror dip will occur when reverse is driver!s door is opened. Seat memory - stalk engaged. return is activated along with this option, see All other lock and unlock features remain Comfort entry, page 1.22. active. "BOTH! - both mirrors will dip when reverse is engaged. When comfort entry/exit is "OFF!, the driver!s Press the OK button on the end of the control seat will remain in position at all times. stalk to confirm your choice. "PASSENGER! - passenger!s side mirror will dip when reverse is engaged. Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. ❖ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❡ ❡ ➭ ❵ ➭ ❂ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✔ ✑ ✠ ✤ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✠ ✥ ✠ ✥ ✧ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✧ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✒ ❚ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✮ ✪ ✱ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✰ ✬ ❋ ❑ ❋ ❳ ▼ ✠ ❄ ❄ ❨ ✒ ❚ ❚ ❨ ☞ ▼ ◗ ❚ ✠ ❪ ✡ ☞ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ reverse is selected: ❉ ❁ 1. Switch the ignition on. With "AUTOMATIC! selected, wiper operation 2. Select "BOTH! or "PASSENGER! in the in the Auto position will be controlled by the mirror dip section of the cluster. rain sensor. 3. Depress brake and select reverse gear. With "TIMED! selected, wiper operation in the 4. Adjust mirror(s) to desired position, see Auto position will be an intermittent wipe. To Adjusting mirrors, page 1.39. set the time delay for intermittent wipe, see 5. Take vehicle out of reverse. Wiper Sensitivity, page 3.26. The next time reverse is selected, the vehicle Press the OK button on the end of the control will automatically move the mirror(s) to the stalk to confirm your choice. previously set offset from the normal position. ✒ ✑ ✔ ✍ ✥ ✍ ✔ ✟ ✍ ✤ ✟ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❑ ❋ ✴ the possible tire types available. Select the tires fitted to your vehicle. Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. ❫ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY ❈ Wiper Sensitivity ✽ ✫ ✻ ✼ ✪ ✯ ✶ ✌ ☞ ✒ ☛ ✓ ✑ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✠ ✔ ✠ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✓ ✟ ✟ ✝ ✍ ✡ ✍ ✥ ☛ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✑ ☛ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✌ ❨ ✌ ✔ ✡ ❙ ✌ ✍ ✡ ✓ ✠ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✝ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ❋ ✳ ❋ ✳ ❑ ✳ ❑ ❋ ❑ ❑ ✳ ❉ ❘ sensitivity setting. Move the control stalk up the OK button on the end of the control stalk or down (SCROLL + or -) to achieve your to confirm that you wish to reset to the preferred setting for the wiper operation. This default settings. setting will apply for the rain sensor sensitivity level only and will not affect the intermittent wipe time delay. Press the OK button on the end of the control stalk to confirm your choice. ❢ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Navigation McLaren Track Telemetry NOTE: If no destination has been set using IRIS, only the compass and current road name will be displayed. ☛ ✒ ✥ ✠ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✍ ✧ ✡ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✠ ❚ ❚ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ❄ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ☛ ✠ ✤ ✥ ✓ ✌ ✓ ☛ ✠ ✓ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✥ ✌ ◆ ✟ ✟ ☛ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✓ ✝ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ ❑ ❑ ✵ ✳ ➩ ✴ ❍ ➩ ✳ will be displayed on the left-hand display if has been launched using IRIS, a lap timer will route guidance has been started using IRIS. be displayed on the left-hand display. The turn-by-turn display provides the If available, the speed limit for the current The lap timer provides the following following information: road will be displayed on the right-hand side information: 1. Next turn direction and distance of the central display. 1. Current lap number Closely-coupled next turn if applicable NOTE: Always observe local speed limit 2. Current lap total time 2. Total distance to destination remaining information as the there may be 3. Current lap delta time temporary or new speed restrictions in 3. Total time to destination remaining 4. Best lap time place. 5. Last lap time See McLaren Track Telemetry, page 2.18. ❦ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Messages ✔ ✥ ✟ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✔ ✍ ✟ ✒ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✑ ✡ ✧ ☛ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ✳ ✴ ✴ ❋ ➩ WARNING: Do not ignore warning that refer you to the Owner Manual. The table messages, failure to take appropriate below indicates what you should do when one action may result in injury or damage of these messages is displayed. to the vehicle. ❂ ❈ ❀ ❛ ✽ ✪ ✽ ✪ ✹ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✻

Battery Low See Charging the battery, page 5.13. Battery Charge Required Battery Management Active The vehicle is not be able to supply enough voltage and has activate power saving mode. The climate control and steering will operate with reduced effect. See Power saving mode, page 2.2. Brake Fluid Level Low Top up brake fluid, see Brake fluid, page 5.8. Climate Control Fault The climate control system is not functioning correctly. Please contact your McLaren Retailer. Go to McLaren Service Center See CLIMATE CONTROL, page 4.4. Clutch Over Temperature The vehicle has been subject to extreme operating conditions. This may be caused by excessive hill starts, repeated hard acceleration, driving slowly up steep hills for extended periods. As a result, the gearbox may limit engine torque. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle in neutral for a few minutes. Clutch Temperature High The vehicle has been subject to extreme operating conditions. This may be caused by excessive hill starts, repeated hard acceleration, driving slowly up steep hills for extended periods. As a result, the gearbox may limit engine torque. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle in neutral for a few minutes. Engine Oil Level High See Checking the engine oil, page 5.2. ❧ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Message Action ✒ ✞ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✞ ✍ ✥ ◗ ☛ ✡ ❳ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✒ ✡ ☛ ✝ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✎ ✡ ☛ ☛ ❙ ✥ ✥ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ❋ ✳ ❑ ♠ ✳ ✳ ✵ ❁ ➊ ✳

ESC Failure The Electronic Stability Control is not functioning correctly. As a result, the engine torque will be Go to McLaren Service Center significantly limited and the vehicle will enter Limphome mode. Care should be taken while driving in this condition, the braking and traction control related driving aids will not be fully functional. Please contact your McLaren Retailer, see Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34. ESC Not Reinstated The ESC has not been reactivated. Care should be taken while driving in this condition, the braking and traction control related driving aids will not be fully functional. See Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34. ESC OFF Not Possible The ESC deactivation conditions have not been met. See Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34. ESC OFF The ESC deactivation procedure has not been followed correctly. See Electronic Stability Control, Invalid Operation page 2.34. ESC Reduced Not Possible The ESC reduction conditions have not been met. See Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34. ESC Reinstatement Not Possible The ESC reactivation conditions have not been met. Care should be taken while driving in this condition, the braking and traction control related driving aids will not be fully functional. See Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34. Front Left Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Inflated Front Left Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Temperature Front Left Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Pressure Low ➦ ✷ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Message Action ✡ ✠ ✌ ✥ ☛ ❚ ✥ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✑ ❘ ➋ ✳ Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Inflated Front Right Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Temperature Front Right Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Pressure Low Key Battery Critically Low See Replacing key fob battery, page 5.28. Key Battery Low See Replacing key fob battery, page 5.28. Launch Mode Aborted See Launch control, page 2.29. Launch Mode Unavailable The conditions to enable a Launch have not been met, see Launch control, page 2.29. Rear Left Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Inflated Rear Left Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Temperature Rear Left Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Pressure Low Rear Right Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Inflated ➨ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

EFT-HAND D ISPLAY

Message Action ✡ ✠ ✠ ✥ ✟ ❚ ✡ ✥ ✌ ✑ ❘ ❘ ✳ Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Over Temperature Rear Right Tire Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34. Pressure Low Steering Fluid Level Low Top up the power steering fluid, see Power steering fluid, page 5.7. Windscreen Washer Fluid Low Top up windscreen washer fluid, see Windscreen washers, page 5.9. Vehicle Limphome The vehicle has recovered from a previous system error. As a result in this mode, the engine Engine Restart Required torque will be significantly limited. Care should be taken while driving in this condition. To reinstate full performance please stop the vehicle and restart the engine. If the problem persists, contact your McLaren Retailer. See Limphome mode, page 2.14. ♥ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

ENTRAL D ISPLAY ➽ ➄ ➇ ❿ ➈ ➂ ➅ ➇ ➄ ❮ ➸ ➁ ➀ ➆ Display Window ❈ ❝ ✿ ❂ ✭ ✼ ✪ ✬ ✰ ✬ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ◆ ✥ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✥ ◆ ✒ ✒ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✤ ✟ ✤ ✍ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❑ ❑ ❋ ❋ ✴ For more information regarding individual visual access to the control settings and functions see: current performance values of the vehicle. • LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4 The central display, as indicated above, is • CENTRAL DISPLAY, page 3.32 displayed when the vehicle is in Normal mode. • RIGHT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.36 The information displayed in the center section of the instrument cluster will change dependent on the mode selected. See Sport Mode, page 3.33 and Track Mode, page 3.34. ✷ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

ENTRAL D ISPLAY

Sport Mode ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ◆ ✥ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✥ ◆ ✒ ✒ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✤ ✟ ✤ ✍ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❑ ❑ ❋ ❋ ✴ For more information regarding individual visual access to the control settings and functions see: current performance values of the vehicle. • LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4 The central display, as indicated above, is • CENTRAL DISPLAY, page 3.32 displayed when the vehicle is in Sport mode. • RIGHT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.36 The information displayed in the center section of the instrument cluster will change dependent on the mode selected. See Normal Mode, page 3.32 and Track Mode, page 3.34. ▲ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

ENTRAL D ISPLAY

Track Mode ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ◆ ✥ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✥ ◆ ✒ ✒ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✤ ✟ ✤ ✍ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❑ ❑ ❋ ❋ ✴ For more information regarding individual visual access to the control settings and functions see: current performance values of the vehicle. • LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4 The central display, as indicated above, is • CENTRAL DISPLAY, page 3.32 displayed when the vehicle is in Track mode. • RIGHT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.36 The information displayed in the center section of the instrument cluster will change dependent on the mode selected. See Normal Mode, page 3.32 and Sport Mode, page 3.33. ❖ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

ENTRAL D ISPLAY

Gear Position Indicator Handling and Powertrain Display Electronic Stability Control Mode Display ✌ ✠ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✓ ✝ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✟ ❚ ✡ ✳ ❋ ✳ ✡ ✤ ✟ ✌ ✌ ✒ ✥ ✍ ❙ ✥ ✧ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ❳ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✥ ✦ ☛ ✒ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✠ ✥ ✦ ☛ ✒ ❍ ✴ ❁ ❁ ndling and powertrain position selected: Neutral, Gear 1-7, or mode selected is displayed. For more selected is displayed. For more information Reverse. The indicator will also show A or M information on the different settings that are on the different settings that are available, depending on whether Automatic or Manual available, see Active dynamics control, see Active dynamics control, page 2.24. mode is selected. page 2.24. The gear position indicator moves to the NOTE: If the ACTIVE button has not been center of the instrument cluster, swapping pressed (active dynamics panel is off), position with the speedometer, when the the Handling and Powertrain displays will vehicle is in Sport or Track mode. See Sport both show Normal and will be displayed Mode, page 3.33 and Track Mode, page 3.34. in white. For more information, see Manual/Automatic The mode will not be implemented if all mode, page 2.21. pre-conditions are not met. ❫ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

IGHT-HAND D ISPLAY ➽ ➄ ➇ ❿ ➈ ➂ ➅ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➻ ➺ ➸ ➻ ➃ ➂ ❮ Oil Temperature Water Temperature If the gauge shows high temperature, ORANGE, slow down until the temperature drops to normal. If the temperature continues to rise and the gauge turns RED, a warning message will appear in the central display. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and contact your McLaren Retailer immediately. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✌ ❚ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✍ ✡ ✥ ✒ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ✴ ❑ ❋ ❑ ✴ ❑ a colored gauge on the right-hand side of the form of a colored gauge on the right-hand instrument cluster. side of the instrument cluster. When the engine is first started the gauge will When the engine is first started the gauge will be BLUE. As the engine warms up the color be BLUE. As the engine warms up the color will change to GREEN, indicating normal will change to GREEN, indicating normal temperature. temperature. High temperature is indicated if the gauge High temperature is indicated if the gauge turns ORANGE and excessive temperature is turns ORANGE and excessive temperature is indicated by the gauge turning RED. indicated by the gauge turning RED. ❢ ▲ ♦ ▲ INSTRUMENTS

IGHT-HAND D ISPLAY

Fuel Level and Range ✡ ✠ ✓ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✥ ✠ ✑ ✑ ✓ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✑ ✔ ✟ ✔ ✦ ❄ ✡ ♠ ❑ ✳ ❋ ✳ ✳ The gauge turns RED when there is less than ORANGE, slow down until the temperature approximately 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of fuel drops to normal. If the temperature continues remaining in the tank. to rise and the gauge turns RED, a warning ❈ message will appear in the central display. ✪ ✭ ✹ ✼ ✸ ✪ ✯ ➉ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✓ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✡ Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and ❘ ✳ vehicle requires refuelling. contact your McLaren Retailer. ✼ ✪ ✲ ✪ ✼ ✼ ✪ ✯ ➉ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✧ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✡ ✓ ✦ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ✴ colored gauge on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster. The gauge is green when there is more than approximately 2.9 gallons (11 liters) of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge turns AMBER when there is less than approximately 2.9 gallons (11 liters) of fuel remaining in the tank. ❦ ▲ ♦ ▲

♥

✏

♦

✗

❖

✏

...... 4.15

...... 4.21

...... 4.14 ...... 4.18

...... 4.15

...... 4.19

...... 4.20

...... 4.17

...... 4.19

......

③

①

⑥

❸

✳

☛

✥

✌

①

✑

②

✳

✥

✍

⑥

✠

❷

✒

✉

✥

✠

⑥

✡

✌

①

☛

Accessory sockets...... power sockets...... USB Cup holders...... Cup Sun visors...... Entry lighting...... Stowage compartments...... Stowage Owner documentation...... Owner Exitlighting ...... Stowage nets......

❄

✉

✏ ✚

✎

10 ✗

✏ ✏ 4.9

4.8

. 4.8

✏

.. 4.7 .. 4.2

.. 4.5

.. 4.7

.. 4.12

...... 4.11

...... 4.10

...... 4.4

⑤

①

③

④

③

④

⑥

①

......

...... 4.

......

❷

❶

......

①

⑥

......

①

⑨

❶

✉

✇

①

⑨

❷

⑥

①

⑨

❷

❶

③

❋ ❋

①

✡ ✡

▲

✥ ✥

✴

◆ ◆

❶

✌

✠ ✠

✡

✡ ✡

M ✦

⑤ ◆ ◆

✟

✈ ✉

Heatedseats...... System CalibrationSystem ...... Heatedmirror...... A/C (Screen) Button ...... Modes ofModes Operation...... Air Distribution Settings...... Air Distribution Opening closing...... and Controls ...... In eventof theft the a ...... Temperature Control ...... Demisting/Defrosting...... Air Recirculation Mode ...... Blower Speed Control ...... ❙

◗ ◗

⑨ ❷

C WINDOWS ❶ ⑨ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

INDOWS ➈ ❰ ❾ ➅ ➁ ➂ ❰ Safety Opening and closing ❈ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ❈ ❀ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✽ ❤ ❣ ✬ ✬ ✫ ✼ ✼ ✮ ✪ ❥ ❊ ✪ ❅ ✪ ❤ ✪ ✸ ✸ ✬ ✬ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✯ ✽ ❊ ✸ ➳ trapped as you open or close the engine to be started and is also used windows. Do not rest any part of your to activate other features on the body against the window. There is a vehicle. risk of becoming trapped by the Take the key fob with you, every time movement of the window. If there is a you leave the vehicle to prevent risk of entrapment, stop movement unsupervised operation of the of the window. windows, which may result in injury. Switches for both windows are located on the driver!s door console. A switch for the passenger!s window is located on the passenger!s door console.

1. Driver!s window switch. 2. Passenger!s window switch. Press switch (1) or (2) . The window will open for as long as the switch is pressed. Pull switch (1) or (2) . The window will close for as long as the switch is pressed. To open or close a window fully, press or pull switch (1) or (2) fully and release. NOTE: To stop a window opening or closing, press or pull the appropriate switch. ✷ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

INDOWS ➬ ➷ ❀ ➭ ➭ ➪ ❛ ❈ ➡ ➞ ➔ ➔ ➛ ➤ ➤ ↔ ➙ ↕ ➔ ↕ ➛ ➝ ➤ ↕ ➢ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➒ ➣ ➑ ✃ ➐ ➏ ➎ ✸ ✪ ✻ ✬ ✱ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✸ ❈ ❀ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ mode, window control will not be ✸ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✼ ✪ ✰ ✻ ✼ ✲ ✱ ✬ ❅ ✸ ❊ ✬ ✶ available. If accessory mode is entered unattended in the vehicle, they could just after the engine has been stopped be injured by the movement of the using the START/STOP button and the window. windows are not fully closed, window Anti-trap protection will stop windows closing control will still be available until: if an obstruction or resistance is detected. • the windows are fully closed If the anti-trap protection is triggered, check • the vehicle enters sleep mode the window and the window aperture and • a door is opened remove any obstruction, before operating the windows again. In the event of an anti-trap ❜ ✽ ❣ ✬ ✰ ✸ ✱ ❣ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✻ ✻ ✪ ✽ ✪ event when closing the door, see Closing a ✔ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✓ ✡ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✤ ✧ ❚ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✴ ❍ ❍ ❋ ❋ door, page 1.9. been discharged or disconnected, or if the Push switches (1) and (2) downwards until the anti-trap feature has been activated. windows are open and hold them in this position for 5 seconds. Ensure that both doors are closed and the ignition is switched on. Pull both switches upwards until the windows are closed and hold them in this position for 5 seconds. The windows are now reset. If this does not resolve the issue, please contact your McLaren Retailer immediately. ▲ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL ➇ ❾ ❮ ➸ ➁ ❾ ➆ ➀ ➸ ➄ ➾ ➂ ➇ ➆ Overview Controls ✝ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✒ ✟ ✝ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❑ ✴ mode or settings can be adjusted manually. The combination filter reduces the quantity of dust and pollutants entering the vehicle. WARNING: Follow the recommended settings given for heating or cooling. If the windows mist up, you may no longer be able to observe road and traffic conditions and could cause an accident. NOTE: The climate control system operates more effectively with the doors and windows closed. However, if the ☛ ✥ ✔ ✓ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✌ ✔ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✥ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✑ ❚ vehicle has been✳ standing❑ ✴ in a hot the touchscreen located on the center environment for a long time, ventilate by console. Press the button to switch on the opening the windows briefly. climate control screen. NOTE: The interior air temperature sensor is located between the steering wheel and the center console. Do not obstruct airflow to this sensor or the performance of the climate control system will be reduced. NOTE: The vehicle will retain the current climate control settings when the ignition is switched off. ❖ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

Modes of Operation ❂ ❈ ❀ ❛ ✿ ✪ ✰ ✱ ✬ ✬ ✻ ✻ ✯ ☛ ◗ ✒ ✌ ❲ ✗ ✌ ◗ ✓ ▼ Climate Controls ❍ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✥ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✡ ✤ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✧ ✝ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ☛ ❄ 2. Heated mirror♠ button 3. AUTO/AUTO LO button system maintains the set interior 4. Air conditioning (A/C) button temperature using a combination of differing blower speeds, air recirculation and air 5. Demist button distribution. 6. Air recirculation button The control panel uses different colors to 7. Temperature control - Right-hand side indicate operational states: 8. Heated seat button - Right-hand side • Orange indicates ON. 9. Blower speed control • 10. Heated seat button - Left-hand side White indicates OFF but available for use. • Grey indicates not available for use. 11. Air distribution buttons 12. Temperature control - Left-hand side To switch on automatic mode, touch the AUTO button. The light on the button illuminates and the air distribution, temperature and blower speed are adjusted automatically on both sides of the vehicle. In AUTO mode, there is no need to adjust the blower speed or air distribution, the system will operate whichever controls it needs to maintain the set temperature. ❫ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL ☛ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✝ ✒ ✒ ✌ ✤ ✑ ✦ ❄ ✔ ✓ ✥ ✒ ✳ ❋ ✴ the air distribution of the AUTO LO mode will be activated again. The driver can exit MONO mode at any time the climate control system, touch the Pressing the AUTO button a second time will by a single touch of the MONO button. The preferred button. This will then put the select the AUTO mode. MONO button on the screen will then system into AUTO fan mode. If necessary, the system settings can be extinguish. This is denoted by the color of the blower manually adjusted, see Manual Mode, speed slider. The bar is grey and the slider page 4.6. moves by itself when the blower is under ❈ ❈ ❂ ❂ automatic control. Here, the system is ✯ ✸ ✼ ✪ ✰ ✬ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✓ ✔ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✓ ❹ ✤ ✟ ✒ ❚ continuing to control♠ ❑ the blower speed to maintain the set temperature. There is an Temperature Control, page 4.8. additional mode known as AUTO LO. The To adjust the blower speed manually, see AUTO LO function operates the fan at lower Blower Speed Control, page 4.9. speeds to achieve and maintain the desired ❂ ➫ ❝ ➫ ❂ cabin temperature. This reduces the level✪ of✰ ✬ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✍ ✟ ✍ ✔ ✟ ✑ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✝ ✡ ✤ ✒ ✧ ◗ ❲ ◗ ▼ sound emitted✳ ❋ ✴ from the climate control system whilst retaining auto functionality. makes to their air temperature settings to be To switch on AUTO LO, press the AUTO mirrored automatically to the passenger!s button once when in AUTO mode. The AUTO temperature setting. LO symbol will change from white to orange. Touching the on-screen MONO button will To return to AUTO, press the AUTO button a cause it to illuminate and automatically single time. implement the driver!s air temperature settings to the passenger!s side. If the blower speed is adjusted while AUTO LO is active the manual mode will be selected by default. If the AUTO button is then pressed ❢ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

A/C (Screen) Button Demisting/Defrosting ✦ ✥ ☛ ✤ ✥ ✥ ✧ ✓ ✑ ✡ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✍ ☛ ✒ ✟ ✒ ✝ ✔ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ➧ ✑ ☞ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ ✳ ✳ ❁ Touch the demist button again to exit the of air. It is used by max-cooling and defrosting demist mode. The icon on the button modes. extinguishes, and the air temperature and Use the A/C screen button as an ON/OFF blower speed return to their original settings. switch. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✟ ◆ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✟ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✓ ✧ ✡ ✤ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✑ ✝ ✓ ✒ ❚ ❍ screen demist function. The button will illuminate and an icon will be displayed at the top of the screen to indicate the function is active. The air conditioning switches on if previously off and the blower will operate at full speed with the air temperature set to "HI!. NOTE: It is possible to manually reduce the blower speed, see Blower Speed Control, page 4.9. NOTE: Air recirculation is inhibited when demist mode is selected. ❦ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

Temperature Control Air Recirculation Mode To set the temperature to maximum, touch the + button until "HI! is displayed. In AUTO mode, the climate control system adjusts the air temperature to the highest setting, the blower speed is set to maximum and air is directed to the footwells. To set the temperature to minimum, touch the - button until "LO! is displayed. In AUTO mode, the climate control system sets the air temperature to the lowest setting, the blower speed is set to maximum and air is directed to the center air vents. The temperature set will appear on the ✌ ☛ ✟ ✔ ☛ ✟ ✓ ✡ ☛ ✍ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✟ ✍ ✓ ✝ ✠ ✥ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✍ ✡ ❙ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✝ ☛ ✥ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✖ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✑ ✝ ✓ ✒ ❚ ❑ ❋ ❍ displays above the driver!s and passenger!s temperature, or touch the - button to controls on the touchscreen. smells or fumes are entering the vehicle. Air decrease. Alternatively, touch the from outside the vehicle is now prevented NOTE: With "LO! selected, it is not temperature control slider and drag it to the from entering the cabin. possible to switch off the air desired setting. conditioning. WARNING: Switch to air recirculation NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted mode briefly if outside temperatures in 1°F (0.5°C) increments from 61°F to are low. Be aware that the windows 83°F (16°C to 28°C) by using the + to could mist up, which may impair your increase and - to decrease the visibility. As a result, you could be temperature, until the desired setting is distracted from road and traffic achieved. conditions and cause an accident. ❧ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

Blower Speed Control ➲ ➞ ➣ ➟ ➙ ↕ ➙ ➞ ↕ ➣ ↕ ➜ ➙ ➞ ➤ ➡ ↕ ↔ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➙ ➞ ➢ ➒ ➤ ➣ ➑ ↕ ➐ ➏ ➎ Touch the + button to increase the blower prevent the windows misting. speed, or touch the - button to decrease Touch the air recirculation button, to activate blower speed. Alternatively, touch the fan air recirculation. The touch screen button will icon and drag it to the desired setting. illuminate. To switch off air recirculation, If in automatic mode, adjusting the blower touch the button again and the button speed will cause the AUTO button to illumination will be extinguished. extinguish. Press the AUTO button to return to automatic mode. ➜ ➛ ➣ ➡ ↔ ➣ ➔ ➣ ➔ ➡ ↕ ✃ ➔ ↕ ➛ ➙ ↕ ➟ ➙ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➒ ➙ ➑ ➛ ➐ ➢ ➏ ➎ the blower speed is limited and the air is directed at the windscreen until the engine has warmed up. The blower speed may be limited, dependent on the ignition. NOTE: When the engine is restarted from hot, the blower may operate at low speed. This removes warm air from the vents, the blower speed will then increase to the requested setting. ➦ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

Air Distribution Settings Heated seats ➹ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❈ ❛ ❵ ✐ ✮ ✸ ✭ ✱ ✫ ✯ ✬ ❥ ✽ ✱ ✭ ✪ ❅ ✻ ❊ ✰ ✬ ✱ ✬ ✲ ❈ ❈ ❛ ✽ ✻ ✬ ✸ ✶ ❤ ✪ ✰ ✭ ❅ ❱ ✽ ✭ ✱ constantly monitor the seat temperature. WARNING: The heated seats will not switch off automatically once it reaches its optimum temperature dependent on the level selected. Please ensure the switch of the heated seat function is turned off once the desired heat/period of heat has been achieved. ☛ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✝ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✌ ✓ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✠ ✥ ✟ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ ❍ ❍ air-distribution controls. ✍ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✓ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✤ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✥ ✡ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✠ ✓ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✟ ✓ ➥ ✟ ☛ ✠ ✓ ❚ Press the top screen area to direct air to the the vent is open or closed. windscreen, press the middle screen area to direct air to the center air vents, press the bottom screen area to direct air to the footwell vents. All three screen areas, a combination of any two or an individual area can be selected at any time. When an air distribution screen area is pressed, the screen icon will illuminate. ➨ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

Heated mirror NOTE: Seat heating is only available when the engine is running. If seat heating is not available, the button will appear greyed out. NOTE: Seat heating will switch off automatically when the engine is stopped by the Eco Start-Stop System, but will resume heating when the engine restarts. See Eco Start-Stop system, page 2.12. ❝ ✾ ❜ ❝ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ❀ ❈ ❀ ❵ ❈ ✿ ❈ ❊ ✪ ✪ ✲ ✮ ✯ ✬ ✸ ✰ ✼ ✪ ✯ ✻ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✑ ✝ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✓ ✑ ✝ ✓ ✒ ❚ ✳ ❋ ❍ on to the low temperature setting, the icon ice or snow from the mirrors and on the button will partially illuminate. Touch windows before setting off. Impaired again to switch to the high temperature visibility could endanger yourself and setting, the icon on the button will fully others. illuminate. Touch the button to heat the exterior mirrors. To switch off, touch the button again and the The icon on the button will illuminate. To icon on the button will be extinguished. switch off, touch the button again and the icon on the button will be extinguished. The seat heater will remain in operation until switched off. The heated mirrors switch off automatically after a set time, depending on the outside air temperature. ♥ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

LIMATE C ONTROL

System Calibration ✍ ✍ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✤ ✒ ✥ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✌ ✔ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✥ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ ❑ ✴ ✴ re-calibrate itself to ensure optimum system performance is maintained. During this cycle, the #Calibrating$ message is shown on the display and system operation is inhibited. Calibration should take no more than a minute and when complete the #Calibrating$ message will disappear from the display. If the #Calibrating$ message does not disappear, contact your McLaren Retailer. ✷ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

O-JACK S TOLEN V EHICLE R ECOVERY S YSTEM

✠ ✆ ✌ ☞ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✁ ✟ ✞ ✝ ✆ ☎ ✄ ✂ ✁ OverviewRECOVERY SYSTEM In the event of a theft ✔ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✒ ✝ ✗ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ✒ ✞ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✥ ✌ ◆ ✦ ✠ ✒ ✡ ◆ ✒ ☛ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✤ ✥ ☛ ◆ ✒ ✥ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ ❍ ✴ ➩ ❋ ❑ Jack Vehicle Recovery System. If you need stolen, report the theft to the local Police further clarification, contact your McLaren authority including the details of the VIN. Retailer. 2. The theft is then recognized by the NCIC The Lo-Jack system comprises a small, silent database which automatically triggers radio transmitter installed in the vehicle to aid the activation of the Lo-Jack transmitter locating the vehicle in the event of a theft. in the stolen vehicle. Once installed, the transmitter and the 3. Once the transmitter is activated, it will Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) are transmit a signal which can be detected registered with the National Crime by tracking units fitted to Police vehicles Information Center (NCIC) database, used by within a 2-3 mile radius. federal, state and local law enforcement 4. When the Police secure the stolen agencies throughout the USA. vehicle, arrangements will have to be made with you for the vehicle to be collected. The Police may recover the vehicle to a secure compound for further investigation. You may be liable for any recovery and storage charges. ▲ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES ➈ ➀ ❮ ➸ ➄ ➀ ➼ ❮ ❾ ➂ ❮ ➀ ➸ ➁ ➂ Interior lighting Entry lighting ✌ ✥ ✠ ✓ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✌ ✥ ✔ ✍ ☛ ✠ ✥ ✥ ✌ ☛ ◆ ✟ ✥ ✥ ☛ ✌ ✍ ✔ ❳ ✧ ✑ ✡ ✥ ◆ ✒ ✠ ✴ ❍ ✴ ✴ ✳ ✳ ❑ ❜ ❈ ✽ ✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ ✼ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✰

✑ ✔ ✝ ✤ ✓ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ when you approach the vehicle. ❑ (1) or (3) to switch on the desired reading light. When the vehicle is unlocked, the headlamps For gradual reading illumination, press and and tail lamps illuminate for a period of time hold touch pad (1) or (3) until desired lighting or until the ignition is switched on. is achieved. To set the entry lighting duration, see External Press touch pads (1) or (3) again to switch off Lighting, page 3.18. the respective reading light. ✹ ✸ ✱ ✻ ❅ ✹ ✱ ✼ ✮ ✽ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✯ ✬ ✺ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✍ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✦ ✓ ✒ ✒ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ following areas: • the driver!s and passenger!s footwells, ✍ ✟ ✓ ➧ ✤ ✦ ✦ ✟ ✠ ✒ ➧ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✒ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✍ ✡ ✑ ✠ ✤ ☛ ✗ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✞ ✳ ✳ ✳ ➩ touch pad when you open a door • 2. Interior lighting on/off touch pad the center console (illuminated by a light within the overhead light panel), if the 3. Right-hand reading light on/off/gradual ignition is on touch pad • the interior door handles, if the ignition For full interior lighting, press the touch pad is on (2) quickly. The courtesy lighting extinguishes one NOTE: Ensure that the interior lighting is minute after the doors have been closed or switched off when leaving the vehicle. when the ignition is switched on. To switch off the interior lighting, press touch The luggage compartment light illuminates pad (2) again. when the luggage compartment is opened. ❖ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES

Exit lighting Stowage nets ✌ ✥ ✠ ✓ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✌ ✥ ✔ ✍ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✟ ◆ ☛ ✥ ✥ ❳ ✌ ✍ ✔ ✧ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✥ ◆ ✒ ✠ ❈ ❈ ✴ ❍ ✴ ✳ ✳ ❏ ❑ ✻ ✪ ✸ ❣ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✪ ✹ ✽ ❅ ✰ ❥ ✼ ✯ ✩ WARNING: Do not use the stowage when you leave the vehicle by illuminating net to transport any heavy, sharp- the headlamps and tail lamps for a period of edged or breakable objects. time. Occupants could be injured by To set the exit lighting duration, see External objects being thrown around during Lighting, page 3.18. sharp braking, a sudden change of direction or an accident. Exit lighting can also be activated manually by ❈ ❈ pulling the turn signal stalk towards you ✻ ✪ ✸ ❣ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✹ ✽ ✼ ✼ ✪ ❣ ✻ ✬ ✬ ✫ ✭ ✪ ✽ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✽ ✽ momentarily three times. The vehicle must be in an awake state with the ignition off. Every additional pull on the turn signal stalk whilst the exit lighting has been activated will increase the time increment by an additional 15 seconds. ✤ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✍ ✡ ✌ ✓ ✑ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✟ ☞ ☛ ✡ ❍ ✵ Once the vehicle❋ ✳ has been exited, locked and completed its set operating time, the exit between the seats for storing small items. lighting will be extinguished and the function NOTE: The maximum weight the will not be available, unless it is switched on in stowage pocket can support is 2.2 lbs the instrument cluster or is manually (1 kg). activated again through the turn signal stalk. ☛ ✔ ❨ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✔ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✡ ✟ ✟ ☛ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✳ ❑ ❋ ✳ footwell for storing small items. ❫ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES ➯ ➯ ➯ ➛ ➢ ↕ ➣ ➡ ↔ → ➞ ✃ ◆ ➔ ➒ ➛ ➣ ➛ ➑ ↕ ➐ ↕ ➔ ➏ ➎ WARNING: Do not use the stowage passenger!s stowage net are as follows: net to transport any heavy, sharp- • Maximum item size 1 - 9.84 in Height x edged or breakable objects. 7.87 in Width x 0.79 in Depth. Occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around during • Maximum item size 2 - 3.94 in Height x sharp braking, a sudden change of 7.87 in Width x Depth 2.76 in. direction or an accident.

Passenger!s footwell stowage net maximum item size 2 - 3.94 in Height (1) x 7.87 in Width (2) x Depth 2.76 in (3). WARNING: Do not place items in the passenger!s footwell stowage net that exceed the dimensions stated previously. It could lead to personal Passenger!s footwell stowage net maximum injury or prevent the occupant item size 1 - 9.84 in Height (1) x 7.87 in Width restraint system from performing (2) x 0.79 in Depth (3). correctly. ❢ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES

Stowage compartments ❈ ❈ ❀ ✿ ➭ ✿ ❀ ❣ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✻ ✹ ✻ ✽ ✭ ✸ ✬ ✪ ✪ ✼ ✬ ✽ ✭ ✸ ✪ ✻ ✬ ✸ ✪ ✺ WARNING: The stowage compartment NOTE: Always close the stowage must be closed when items are stored compartment when leaving the vehicle, in it. Occupants could be injured by or the interior motion sensor (if fitted) objects being thrown around during will not function. sharp braking, a sudden change of NOTE: The area behind the seats is not direction or an accident. designed for storing luggage or any other personal items. ✡ ✍ ✒ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✝ ✟ ☞ ❑ for storing small items. Depress the release button on the underside of the lid and lift to open. To close, push the lid down firmly and ensure that it is latched securely. The USB and a 3.5 mm auxiliary audio input sockets are located in the stowage NOTE: When the vehicle is locked or compartment. See USB sockets, page 4.21. Valet Mode is on, the stowage compartment will be locked and the release button disabled. ❦ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES

Cup holders Door stowage compartments WARNING: The stowage compartment must not be opened when the door is open as there is a risk of objects falling out. ➴ ❈ ➭ ❈ ❀ ❣ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✪ ✹ ✽ ✻ ✬ ✻ ✪ ❥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✤ ✒ ✡ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✦ ☞ ✔ ✥ ✝ ✌ ✒ ✡ ✳ ❑ ✵ driver!s seat for storing small items. ✌ ☛ ✡ ✥ ☛ ✡ ◆ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✦ ✟ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✤ ✓ ✍ ✝ ✒ ✡ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✡ ★ ✥ ✍ ✥ ✌ ❪ ❑ storage of closed drink containers when on a ✠ ✒ ✦ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✤ ✑ ✝ ✟ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✝ ✟ ☞ ❑ journey. storing small items. WARNING: Drinking while the car is Pull the front edge of the lid to open, push moving could cause you to become back to close. distracted which could lead to an WARNING: The stowage compartment accident. must be closed when items are stored in it. Occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around during sharp braking, a sudden change of direction or an accident. ❧ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES

Owner documentation Sun visors ✒ ✍ ✍ ✒ ☛ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✤ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✌ ➥ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ❋ ✳ ❑ ❑ ❋ documents: • Service and Warranty booklet - provides information on what to do and who to contact in the event of problems. • IRIS user guide - provides information on how to operate all the functions of the IRIS system fitted to your McLaren. ✡ ✔ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✓ ✝ ✒ ✒ ✒ ✡ ✌ ✤ ✌ ✒ ✔ ☛ ✠ ✠ ✒ ✔ ✥ ◆ ☛ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✍ ✒ ✴ ✴ ❋ ❑ ➋ from bright sunlight as you are driving. ❈ ✿ ✽ ✮ ❱ ✭ ✻ ✱ ✬ ✭ ✸ ✭ ✱ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✔ ✥ ◆ ☛ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✡ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✍ ❙ ❑ personal mirror.

These documents can be stored in a slot under the dashboard on the passenger!s side. ➦ ♥ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES

Accessory power sockets ➯ ➯ ➤ ➣ ➞ ➔ ➛ ➞ ➣ ➣ ➡ ➤ ➙ ↔ ➛ ➛ ➠ ➟ ↔ ➟ ➟ → ✍ Interior accessory 12V socket The accessory socket, located in the luggage The interior accessory 12V socket is located compartment, has a maximum load rating of inside the center console stowage 20 Amps and is the only one that can be used compartment and has a maximum load rating to connect a McLaren supplied battery of 15 Amps. charger. NOTE: Do not connect a battery charger NOTE: Do not leave any device (except a to the interior accessory socket. McLaren supplied battery charger), that draws power from the vehicle, connected to the socket for extended periods without the engine running. This may lead to excessive battery drain. ➨ ✷ ♦ ❖ COMFORT A ND C ONVENIENCE

■ NTERIOR F EATURES

USB sockets ❈ ❂ ❀ ➴ ✱ ✽ ✰ ✻ ✬ ➍ ✪ ✽ ✪ ❥ ✩ NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Video and telemetry data from the MTT McLaren Track Telemetry (MTT), USB application will be saved to the USB flash drive socket 3 will be replaced with a connected to this socket. dedicated MTT socket. NOTE: The MTT application will automatically overwrite the files ❈ ❡ ❃ ❀ ❀ ❈ ❂ ❡ ✸ ✪ ✭ ✭ ❥ ✪ ✼ ✪ metry USB socket previously saved on any USB flash drive connected to this socket. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✒ ✍ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✝ ✔ ✌ ✒ ✔ ✡ ❬ ❙ ❪ ✟ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✧ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✵ center console stowage compartment. The 3 media USB sockets can be used to connect USB flash drives, iPods and other compatible MP3 players to the IRIS system. ❬ ❙ ❪ ❚ ❚ ▼ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✡ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✠ ❚ ❚ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✡ ✑ ❚ ➚ ✴ ✵ These sockets can also be used to charge socket is located inside the center console compatible cell phones or media devices. stowage compartment, along with the media USB sockets. ♥ ✷ ♦ ❖

♥

✚

✎ ❻ ✎

✙

♦

✚ ✚ ✏ ✏

✚

❫

.43

➊ ➊

➊ ➊ ➊ 5.40

5.44

..5.26

...... 5.36

...... 5.27

...... 5.41

...... 5.24

...... 5.26

...... 5.43

⑦

...... 5.28

✉

...... 5

......

①

❺

......

❷

......

⑩

ttery ......

✔

✟

✡

③

①

❍

✤

①

⑦

❶

⑥

✟

✤

⑨

✍

☛

①

✡

❍

✡

③

❶

✉

✔

✠

✳ ❺

✉

✠

✡

✌

✉

✠

①

✟

▲

✡

✝

✟ ☛

✇

✞

✥

⑥

❶

❑

⑧

☛

✑ ✉

✥

✝

③

①

✒

✔

✟ ✉

✝

❷

❋

✌

❑

✡

①

▼

⑩

✔

③

✠

✥ ✔

⑨

✥

✠

✥

✡

✳ ⑥

⑩

✤

✌ ③

①

✔

✓

✑

☛

➩

✔

✥

✌

✤

✒

✇

✌

❸ ☞

✦ ❶

✳ ✴

☛

✳

✥

③

✍

✟

☛

⑨ ✳

✥

①

✥

⑥

③

✔

✡ ✡

①

⑦

✵

☛

✍

✝

⑨ ✠

✥

①

⑨

✝

⑥

✡ ✟

✟

✑

✥

✍

❶

❸

✉

✒

①

✡

✇

✔ ✞

✍

✉

❑ ✑

③

✟

✑ ✝

①

☛

③

✡ ✡

⑨

✉

✇

❯ ❪ ❯ Opening luggage compartment - discharged battery discharged - compartment luggage Opening ...... ▼ Door opening from inside - discharged battery...... discharged - from inside opening Door battery fob key Replacing ...... Starting the vehicle...... Car cover...... Car Deflated tire...... Cleaning the interior ...... battery...... Replacement Towing forTowing recovery...... In the eventbreakdown...... of a

❘

▼

✇

①

⑧ ⑧

⑤ ⑥ ⑤

✚

✙

✎

✎ ✗

.13

➊

➊ ➊

.. 5.9

5.20

.... 5.7

..... 5.10

..... 5.21

...... 5.5

...... 5.12

...... 5.17

...... 5.12

...... 5.12 ...... 5.11

...... 5.8

...... 5.11

...... 5.6

...... 5.10

...... 5.17

...... 5.13

...... 5.14

①

❶

......

...... 5

......

①

......

✴

✌

✡

✉

✦

✟

①

❙

⑤

......

✌

⑤

......

☛

⑩

❺ ✡

✉

✧

❸

✌

❑

☛

✥

❊

✡

① ✓

①

➥

⑥

✴

✧

✔

❳

✌

④

✌

✡

✴

✑

✝

❶

✦

❶

✍

✝

✟

✳

✥

✟

✍ ✥

✍

☛

✔

⑦

✒

④

❑

✡

①

T ✡

✴

✡

✍

⑥

✳

✠

✉

⑦

✠

✝

☛

③ ✡

①

✥ ✥

✡

✌ ⑥

✳

✑

①

✔ ✌

✇

①

✡

✟

☛ ✧

✓

③ A

Mainbox...... fuse Secondary fuse box...... Brake fluid...... Windscreen washers...... Power steering fluid...... steering Power Coolant...... Battery fuse box...... Battery fuse Gearbox oil level ...... equipment compartment Luggage ...... Charging the battery the Charging ...... Boost starting from another vehicle...... another from starting Boost Fire extinguisher...... First Aid kit ...... Warning triangle...... Towing eye ...... Tire sealant...... Fuel funnel...... ➋

⑦ ❳ ❬ ❳

⑤

✉ ❸

M FLUIDTOPPING UP ⑨

① ② MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P ❿ ➃ ➁ ➂ ❿ ❿ ❾ ➸ ➅ ➂ ➇ ➼ Engine oil To check the engine oil level manually: 2. The level is viewed in the Vehicle Info 1. Ensure the following conditions are met: section in the left-hand display, see Vehicle Info, page 3.9. • Vehicle stationary and positioned on ✟ ✒ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✔ ✓ ☛ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ❑ ❏ ✳ imately 0.1 quarts of a level surface. 3. Start the engine and hold the engine oil for every 625 miles (1,000 km), depending speed at 2,000 rpm for 40 seconds. • Neutral selected and the foot brake on your style of driving. The oil consumption Allow the engine oil temperature to applied (use left foot). may be higher than this when the vehicle is reach a temperature between 104°F new or if you frequently drive at high engine NOTE: The foot brake must be applied (40°C) and 158°F (70°C). speeds. for the entire duration of the oil level NOTE: The throttle can be fully check. You will only be able to estimate the oil depressed as the engine speed will be consumption after the vehicle has been electronically limited to 2,000 rpm. driven for several thousand miles or 4. When the timer has reached "0!, the oil kilometers. level will be shown on the display along NOTE: Lubricant additives could damage with a description. the engine or gearbox. Damage caused NOTE: The line on the display indicates by such additives is not covered by the the maximum oil level for 19 seconds vehicle warranty. Further information is after the oil level is read. available from your McLaren Retailer. ❀ ✼ ✱ ✬ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ❅ ❥ ✺ ✍ ✍ ✟ ✓ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✧ ✔ ✓ ✡ ✧ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✒ ☛ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ ❍ ✳ checked. No automatic level checks or warnings are provided. ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P ❡ ➭ ➭ ➭ ✼ ✱ ✬ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✯ ✪ ✹ ❅ ✬ ✸ ✻ ✱ ➹ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✫ ✱ ✮ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✫ ✯ ✬ ✽ ✱ ❥ ✽ ✪ ✱ ✭ ✭ ❊ ✪ ❅ the service cover is open, even when the engine is not running. Engine components become very hot. Avoid contact, there is a risk of severe burns. WARNING: Never top up the engine oil and the coolant at the same time as there is a risk of cross contamination. WARNING: If the engine is stopped due to the Eco Start-Stop System you should be aware that the engine may ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✠ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ❄ ♠ ✳ ❍ ❋ ✳ ➊ 2. Unscrew the engine oil filler cap. restart without warning. top up the oil in accordance with the 3. Top up with the correct quantity of following procedure. NOTE: The engine must be switched off Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil, in before carrying out the oil top up NOTE: Once the oil level check has been 0.26 quart quantities. Approximately process. completed and returned a value, do not 2.90 quarts is required to raise the level continue to test the system. This may NOTE: McLaren only recommends the from minimum to maximum. Refer to lead to aeration of the oil and return a use of Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil. Top up quantity, page 5.4. false value. To end the oil level check, 1. Open the service cover, see Service NOTE: Do not overfill. Top up in 0.26 release the throttle pedal and return to Cover, page 1.11. quart quantities and then re-check the Vehicle info menu by moving the before adding further oil. menu stalk back. ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P ❡ ➭ ➭ ❈ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✤ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✡ ✏ ✑ ✑ ✌ ✬ ✯ ✮ ✻ ✯ ✱ ✻ ✸ ❑ ✴ ➩ ✵ ❁ ➴ ✿ level is correct. ✸ ✬ ✽ ✹ ✻ ✪ ✸ ✪ Quantity of oil display required NOTE: If you have inadvertently overfilled the engine with oil, you must 1 - red - under filled 2.0 pt. (1.00 liter) have any excess removed at your 2 - yellow - min. 1.5 pt. (0.75 liter) McLaren Retailer. The engine or the 3 - green - OK 1.0 pt. (0.50 liter) catalytic converter could be damaged. 4 - green - OK 0.5 pt. (0.25 liter) 5. Refit the engine oil filler cap. 5 - green - OK 0.2 pt. (0.10 liter) ENVIRONMENTAL: When topping up, 6 - green - target 0.0 pt. (0.00 liter) take care not to spill any oil. Oil must not 7 - yellow - max. 0.0 pt. (0.00 liter) be allowed to escape into the soil or 8 - red - overfilled Contact your waterways. McLaren Retailer NOTE: Ensure oil filler cap is refitted ➭ ❈ ➫ ✿ correctly. ✪ ✭ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✯ ✻ ✻ ✼ ✱ ✌ ✦ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✒ ✟ ✤ ✍ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✓ ✌ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✍ ✥ ✒ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✔ ✟ ❬ ➩ ❑ ✴ ✥ ✑ ✑ ✒ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✍ ✡ ✥ ✒ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ❄ 6. Close the service cover, see Service ✳ ♠ ✳ ❋ ❑ hand display, add the required quantity of oil Cover, page 1.11. will be displayed in the left-hand display. as shown in the following table. Reduce the vehicle and engine speed until the warning message disappears. ❖ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P

Gearbox oil level ✠ ✔ ✒ ✒ ✑ ✠ ✧ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✒ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✦ ❄ ✡ ✓ ✒ ❑ ❋ ❍ ❑ ❏ ✴ gear shifts, have the gearbox checked by your McLaren Retailer. NOTE: The clutch and gearbox oil has mileage related service intervals. This maintenance can only be carried out by your McLaren Retailer. ❫ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P

Coolant ✤ ☛ ✟ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✓ ✌ ✧ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✒ ✒ ❋ ❏ ❁ WARNING: If the engine is stopped 3. Unscrew the cap fully and remove it. antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Only check the due to the Eco Start-Stop System you 4. The coolant level is correct when it is coolant when the vehicle is positioned on should be aware that the engine may between the lower and upper steps level ground and the engine is cool. restart without warning. inside the filler neck. NOTE: The engine must be switched off 5. Top up if necessary using only Mobil ❡ ➭ ❈ ➭ ❀ ➭ ✯ ✪ ✼ ✻ ✹ ❅ ✬ ✬ ✸ ✸ ✻ ✱ ✬ before carrying out the coolant level Antifreeze Extra. ✿ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❀ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✮ ✽ ✱ ✽ ✹ ✸ ❊ ✱ ✪ ✼ ❅ ✬ ✬ check and top up process. pressurized. Only unscrew the cap 6. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise when the engine is cool. You could be 1. Open the service cover, see Service to the stop. scalded by hot escaping coolant if you Cover, page 1.11. 7. Close the service cover, see Service attempt to unscrew the cap whilst the Cover, page 1.11. engine is still warm. WARNING: Coolant is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling coolant. WARNING: Coolant is toxic. Keep containers sealed and away from children. If coolant is accidentally consumed, seek medical help straight away. WARNING: Never top up the engine oil and the coolant at the same time as there is a risk of cross contamination. 2. Slowly unscrew the cap by half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. ❢ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P

Power steering fluid ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✽ ✱ ✰ ✱ ✯ ✼ ✫ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✭ ✪ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✭ ✪ ❊ ❣ ✬ highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling power steering fluid. WARNING: Power steering fluid is toxic. Keep containers sealed and away from children. If fluid is accidentally consumed, seek medical help straight away.

Right-hand drive models Left-hand drive models 5. Measure the distance, inside the ❀ ✼ ✪ ✲ ✪ ✼ ✰ ✱ ✯ ✼ ✫ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ❅ ❥ ✺ reservoir, down to the fluid level. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✠ ✟ ✌ ✔ ✤ ☛ ✟ ☛ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✡ ☛ ✗ ✑ ✌ ❙ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✥ ✳ ❋ Maximum fill level is 50 mm and engine. Select normal handling mode, minimum fill level is 55 mm from the top see Handling control, page 2.25. of the filler neck. 2. Allow the engine to idle for 20 seconds 6. Top up if necessary using only Pentosin before checking the fluid level. CHF202 power steering fluid, contact 3. Open the luggage compartment, see your McLaren Retailer. Luggage compartment, page 1.12. 7. Replace the cap and access cover. 4. Remove the access cover, then unscrew 8. Close the luggage compartment, see the cap counter-clockwise and remove Luggage compartment, page 1.12. it. ❦ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P

Brake fluid ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✮ ✼ ❅ ✹ ✱ ❅ ✽ ✱ ✰ ✱ ✯ ✼ ❊ ✫ ✭ ✪ ✩ ❥ flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling brake fluid. WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. Keep containers sealed and away from children. If fluid is accidentally consumed, seek medical help straight away. WARNING: Only use fluid from new, air tight containers. NOTE: Avoid spilling brake fluid, it is harmful to painted surfaces. Any Right-hand drive models Left-hand drive models spillages must be removed immediately with a mixture of car shampoo and 4. Top up if necessary using only new ❀ ✼ ✪ ✲ ✪ ✼ ✰ ✱ ✯ ✼ ✫ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ❅ ❥ ✺ water. Pentosin DoT 5.1 brake fluid. ✡ ✌ ✡ ☛ ✔ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✧ ✍ ✒ ✌ ✗ ✟ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✌ ◗ ☛ ✡ ♠ ✳ ✳ ❑ ✳ ❑ NOTE: The engine must be switched off Luggage compartment, page 1.12. 5. Replace the cap and access cover. before carrying out the brake fluid check 2. Remove the access cover, then unscrew 6. Close the luggage compartment, see and top up process. the cap counter-clockwise and remove Luggage compartment, page 1.12. it. 3. The brake fluid is correct if the level just covers the base of the filter in the filler neck. ❧ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ LUID T OPPING U P

Windscreen washers ❈ ❝ ✾ ➴ ❝ ❞ ❜ ✿ ❛ ❈ ❵ ✽ ✰ ✱ ✪ ✭ ✯ ❊ ✼ ✫ ✬ ✭ ❣ ✪ ❅ ✪ ✽ ❀ ✼ ✪ ✲ ✪ ✼ ✰ ✱ ✯ ✼ ✫ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ❅ ❥ ✺ 4. Open the reservoir cap, top up the highly flammable. Fire, naked flames reservoir with washer fluid and close the ✡ ✌ ✡ ☛ ✔ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✧ ✍ ✒ ✌ ✗ ✟ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✌ ◗ ☛ ✡ ♠ ✳ ✳ ❑ ✳ ❑ and smoking are prohibited when Luggage compartment, page 1.12. cap. handling washer fluid. 2. Mix a solution of Mobil Screenwash 5. Replace the access cover. WARNING: Washer fluid is toxic. Keep concentrate and water in a container 6. Close the luggage compartment, see containers sealed and away from before adding to the reservoir. Luggage compartment, page 1.12. children. If fluid is accidentally Concentration of the washer solution consumed, seek medical help straight should be mixed to suit the outside away. temperatures. NOTE: McLaren recommends the use of Mobil Screenwash concentrate. NOTE: Add washer fluid to the reservoir all year round. The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located in the luggage compartment. The reservoir has a capacity of approximately 2.6 quarts.

3. Remove the access cover. ➦ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

✎ MERGENCY E QUIPMENT ➸ ➁ ➀ ➾ ❿ ➂ ✏ ➀ ➽ ➆ ➁ ➀ ➃ ❮ ➀ ➾ ➀ Emergency Equipment Safety Luggage compartment equipment Warning triangle ✌ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✝ ✓ ✠ ✧ ☛ ➥ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ❬ ♠ ❑ ✴ ✳ ✳ familiarize yourself with the following safety information. WARNING: Always ensure the emergency equipment supplied is used in the proper manner and for the purpose it was designed. Always use the emergency equipment in a safe and responsible manner and be aware of other road users. ☛ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✥ ✑ ✡ ☛ ✠ ✍ ✠ ✌ ❚ ✟ ➬ ➲ ✳ ✳ ❋ ➝ ➛ → ✃ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➜ ➙ ➛ ↔ ➞ ➣ ➟ ➛ ➙ ➛ ↕ ➢ ➐ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ (1) is located at the front funnel are supplied fitted inside the first of the luggage compartment. aid kit case. ➨ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

✎ MERGENCY E QUIPMENT

First Aid kit Tire sealant Setting up the warning triangle ✌ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✤ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✠ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✵ (2) is located at the front of the (3) is located at the front of luggage compartment. the luggage compartment. ✡ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✌ ✤ ✍ ✒ ✳ ➋ (1) sideways from the bottom. NOTE: Check the expiry dates of the first For instructions on how to use the tire Pull side reflectors (2) upwards to form a aid kit materials every year, and replace sealant, see Deflated tire, page 5.36. triangle and lock them at the top using press- them if necessary. stud (3) . NOTE: Check the expiry date of the tire sealant every year, and replace if Place the warning triangle at an appropriate necessary. distance from the vehicle to warn other traffic of a breakdown. ♥ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

✎ MERGENCY E QUIPMENT

Towing eye Fuel funnel Fire extinguisher ✦ ✒ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✒ ✍ ✔ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✑ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✥ ✓ ✦ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✑ ❚ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✡ ☛ ☛ ✓ ✦ ✍ ✡ ✓ ✦ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❏ ✳ ❋ ✳ ✴ (4) is located inside the first (5) is located inside the first aid kit case at the front of the luggage aid kit case at the front of the luggage the luggage compartment. compartment. compartment. Release the retaining strap and remove the NOTE: Your McLaren is equipped with a NOTE: Only use the fuel funnel when fire extinguisher. front towing eye mounting only. It is not filling the vehicle with fuel from sources To operate, follow the manufacturer!s possible to tow other vehicles. other than a fuel pump at a gas station. instructions on the side of the fire For information on installing the towing eye, Do not use the fuel funnel when topping extinguisher. see Towing eye and mounting, page 5.44. up coolant, engine oil or any other fluids NOTE: The fire extinguisher must be in the vehicle. checked every year or it may fail in an emergency. Once the extinguisher is used it will have to be replaced. ✷ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❇ ATTERY C ARE A ND M AINTENANCE ➀ ➆ ➁ ➄ ➁ ➀ ➸ ➁ ➂ ➄ ➾ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➀ ❮ ➄ ➆ ➽ ❮ ➀ ➸ ➸ ➄ Battery safety Charging the battery ✡ ★ ✥ ✠ ✟ ✥ ✍ ✥ ✠ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✠ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✡ ✡ ✑ ✡ ✦ ✔ ✌ ✑ ✝ ✌ ✓ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ❬ ➯ ➬ ➯ ✳ ♠ ✴ ✳ ❍ WARNING: Before use, check that→ ↕ all➢ ➙ ➣ ↕ ➞ ➝ ↕ ➙ ➡ ↕ ➞ ↔ → ➣ ➐ ➞ ➒ ➙ ↕ ➑ ↔ ➐ ➏ ➎ yourself with the following safety information. cables are in good condition; do not battery in optimum condition, always WARNING: Your McLaren is fitted with use cables that are damaged. leave the McLaren supplied battery charger connected to the battery and a lithium ion battery. Only a lithium Ensure that all cables are kept away switched on during periods when your ion battery charger can be used on from sharp edges, are not pinched or this type of battery. Contact your trapped and are not close to hot vehicle is not in regular use. McLaren Retailer for more surfaces or water. NOTE: Do not connect the battery information. Never charge a damaged battery. The charger to the interior accessory socket. WARNING: The lithium ion battery battery must only be charged in a well fitted to your McLaren is sealed for ventilated area; the charger must life and no attempt should be made to never be covered or placed on the break the battery seal to inspect the battery. battery cells. Do not place any metal objects on a WARNING: Leave a suitable lithium battery. You could cause a short ion battery charger connected to the circuit and the battery could ignite. lithium ion battery and switched on Keep the charger out of reach of during periods when your vehicle is children at all times. not in regular use. This will help maintain and prolong the life of the battery.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the battery charger. The charger connects to the accessory socket in the luggage compartment. ▲ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❇ ATTERY C ARE A ND M AINTENANCE

Boost starting from another vehicle ❈ ❀ ✽ ✪ ✼ ✭ ✪ ❤ ✻ ✽ ✬ ✬ ❤ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✽ ➍ ➭ ❀ ✪ ✹ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✯ ✬ ✻ ✭ ✰ ✽ ✪ ✬ ✬ ✩ ✒ ✤ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✓ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✠ ✒ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✗ ✟ ✦ ❄ ❑ ✵ ♠ ❍ ❈ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✽ ✪ ✱ ✭ ❤ ✪ ✻ ❅ ✻ ✻ ✬ ❅ ✻ ❤ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✯ ✽ ❊ ✸ ➳ are 12V and that the booster cables that the battery location is adjacent, but have insulated clamps and are ensure the two vehicles do not touch. approved for use with 12V batteries. 2. Apply the parking brake and ensure that WARNING: Do not connect positive (+) the transmission of both vehicles is set terminals to negative (-) terminals. in neutral (or Park for vehicles with automatic transmission). WARNING: Take care when working 3. Switch off the ignition and all electrical near rotating parts of the engine. equipment in both vehicles. Ensure cables are kept well clear. 4. Open the luggage compartment and NOTE: Do not use a 24V booster start remove any items stowed inside. system. These produce excessive voltage and can damage the vehicle!s 5. Remove the 2 quarter turn screws electrical system. securing the top of the battery access NOTE: It is not possible to push or tow cover. start a vehicle with a discharged battery. NOTE: If using a donor vehicle, please allow it to have the engine running for a minimum of two minutes before trying to start the disabled vehicle. ❖ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❇ ATTERY C ARE A ND M AINTENANCE

12. Check that the cables are clear of any moving components and that all four connections are secure. WARNING: Ensure that each connection is securely made and that there is no risk of the clips accidentally slipping or being pulled from the connection points/battery terminal - this could cause sparking, which could lead to fire or explosion. 13. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for two minutes. 14. The electrical system on the disabled ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✑ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✒ ✌ ✌ ❼ ✦ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✌ ◗ ☛ ✡ ✴ ❍ ❑ ❑ ❑ 8. Connect one end of the positive (+) vehicle should now be ready for the access cover and disconnect the 3 booster cable to the positive (+) terminal engine to be started. electrical connectors on the back of the on the donor vehicle!s battery. 15. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. cover. 9. Connect the other end of the positive (+) 16. Allow both vehicles to idle for two 7. Lift the battery access cover upwards, off booster cable to the positive (+) terminal minutes. its locating pegs, and remove. tab on the disabled vehicle!s battery (A) . 17. Switch off the donor vehicle. 10. Connect one end of negative (-) booster NOTE: Before connecting the booster NOTE: Do not switch on any electrical cable to the negative (-) terminal on the cables, ensure that the battery terminals circuits on the previously disabled donor vehicle!s battery. on the disabled vehicle are correctly and vehicle until after the booster cables securely connected and that all 11. Connect the other end of the negative (-) have been removed. electrical equipment has been switched booster cable to the negative (-) terminal off. on the disabled vehicle!s battery (B) . ❫ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❇ ATTERY C ARE A ND M AINTENANCE ➬ ➬ ➷ ➮ ❈ ❀ ❀ ❀ ➡ ➞ ➜ ➛ ➟ ➡ ↔ ➢ ➤ ➝ ➔ ➝ ↕ → ➒ ➜ ➡ ✃ ➑ ➛ ✃ ➔ ➣ ↕ ➐ ➣ ↔ ➏ ➎ ✽ ✪ ✪ ✼ ❅ ❤ ✻ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✸ ✱ ✽ ✱ ✻ ✸ ✶ ✬ ➹ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❈ ❛ ❵ ✐ ✮ ✸ ✱ ✭ has✯ ✽ ✯ ✬ been✱ ✭ ✪ ✽ ❊ ✰ ✬ disconnected,✱ ✬ ✲ it may be necessary to reset the windows, see use caution when removing the Resetting the windows, page 4.3. If this booster cables as the engine on the does not resolve the issue, please previously disabled vehicle will be contact your McLaren Retailer running. You will be working close to immediately. components carrying high voltage, or may be hot. 1. Disconnect the booster cables in the reverse order to that used for connection. 2. Refit the battery access cover, connect the 2 electrical connectors and secure with the 2 screws. ❢ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ USES ➈ ➀ ➈ ➼ Fuse replacement Main fuse box ❀ ❀ ❈ ● ❈ ❂ ❀ ❀ ❝ ➭ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✽ ✽ ✪ ✬ ❤ ✪ ✽ ✯ ✫ ✸ ✱ ✱ ✪ ❅ ✼ ✪ ✽ ✲ ✪ ✪ ✽ ❅ ✻ ✻ ✪ ✬ ✻ ✽ ❊ ✭ ✯ ➉ There are three fuse boxes fitted to your electrical systems. The failure of any McLaren. fuse will render the system it protects ❃ ❈ ❀ ●

inoperative. ✸ ✬ ✬ ✱ ✻ ✬ ✩ ✪ ✽ ✯ ➉

Use replacement fuses of the same Main fuse Behind a panel in the rear rating and type. Incorrect fuse ratings box bulkhead, behind the left- can overload a system and cause a hand seat. fire or malfunction. Blown fuses should be replaced and no attempt Secondary Below the dashboard on the should be made to repair a blown fuse box passenger!s side. fuse. Battery fuse On top of the battery, in the NOTE: Before removing a fuse, turn off box luggage compartment, all electrical equipment and switch off beneath the luggage the ignition. compartment cover. ✡ ✔ ✓ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✕ ✥ ✟ ✧ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✝ ✝ ✗ ✟ ✒ ❚ ❍ ❏ • if a manual seat is fitted, lift the tilt release lever and tilt the left-hand seat backrest forwards • if an electric seat is fitted, pull the release strap (shown above) and tilt the left-hand seat backrest forwards • if a racing seat is fitted, slide the racing seat forwards ❦ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ USES

5. Fit the access panel by inserting the two No. Amps Circuit protected upper retaining clips in the bulkhead and ✙ ✗ securing with the two lower clips. ➩ ➋ ➩ NOTE: If a replacement fuse does not F11 - - solve the electrical problem, or it fails immediately, contact your McLaren F12 - - Retailer. F13 5 Powertrain Chassis Control Unit ➭ ❈ ❀ ● ❀ ❀ ❈ ❈ ❂ ✽ ✸ ✪ ✬ ✪ ✬ ✽ ✱ ❤ ✱ ✻ ❅ ✯ ✫ ✱ ✫ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✭ ✯ ✫ ✸ ✱ F14 5 Engine Control Module ❀ ❀ ➭ ➭ ❝ ✿ ❛ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✻ ✻ ✱ ✱ ✪ ✬ ✺ ✯ ✻ ✭ ♦ ✽ ✬ F15 10 Relays F1 60 Secondary Air Pump F16 10 OBD Diagnostics F2 - - ☛ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✥ ✔ ✍ ✌ ✒ ✝ ✍ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✎ ✡ ✳ ❑ ❋ ❋ ❘ F17 3 Door Locking Switch panel to the bulkhead and remove the F3 - - panel F18 50 ECU Main Relay Control F4 - - 3. Refer to the fuse specification chart on F19 - - page 5.18 to determine which fuse F5 30 Powertrain Chassis Control protects the non-functioning electrical Unit F20 30 Seat Driver!s system. F6 30 Powertrain Chassis Control F21 30 Seat Passenger!s NOTE: A label identifying the fuses is Unit attached to the inside of the access F22 30 Fuel Pump 1 panel. F7 30 Starter F23 5 Tilt and Microwave Sensor 4. Remove the appropriate fuse and F8 20 Heated Mirrors replace it with a fuse of the same value F24 15 Audio Amplifier (Tier 1 & 2) as the original. If in doubt, check the fuse F9 30 Audio Amplifier (Tier 3) F25 10 Driver!s/Passenger!s Door specification chart. Latch ❧ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ USES

No. Amps Circuit protected No. Amps Circuit protected No. Amps Circuit protected ❄ ✙ ✗ ❼ ✎ ✎ ✏ ✔ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✒ ✒ ✘ ❁ ❁ ➋ ➩ ❘ ➩ ➋ ✳ ❁ ➊ ❘ ➩

F27 15 Audio Amplifier (Tier 1 & 2) R43 - - R58 - ECU Main relay Control F28 - - R44 - - F29 - - F45 10 Electrical Thermostats, Camshaft Actuators F30 - - F46 - - F31 50 Cooling Fan Left-Hand F47 - - F32 50 Cooling Fan Right-Hand F48 - - F33 - - F49 5 Starter F34 20 Wheel Arch Fan R50 - - F35 - - R51 - Heated Mirrors F36 20 Battery Main Relay R52 - - F37 15 Canister Purge R53 - Powertrain Chassis Control F38 15 Fuel Injection and Ignition - Unit Left-Hand Bank R54 - Powertrain Chassis Control F39 15 Fuel Injection and Ignition - Unit Right-Hand Bank R55 - Starter F40 10 Engine Ancillaries R56 - Secondary Air Pump R41 - Wheel Arch Fan ➦ ♥ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ USES

Secondary fuse box ❀ ❀ ❈ ● ➴ ❈ ❀ ✽ ✽ ✪ ✬ ❤ ✪ ✽ ✯ ✫ ✰ ✪ ✸ ✮ ✭ ✬ ➭ ❈ ● ❀ ❀ ➴ ❈ ❀ 4. Lower the closing panel, sufficiently to✽ ✸ ✪ ✬ ✪ ✬ ✽ ✱ ❤ ✱ ✻ ✯ ✫ ✱ ✫ ✪ ✽ ✯ ✰ ✫ ✪ ✸ ✮ ✭ ✬ gain access to the fuse box. chart ✡ ✠ ✔ ✟ ✓ ✒ ✦ ✤ ☛ ✔ ✒ ✥ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✗ ✝ ✝ ☞ ✴ ❍ ❏ gained by lowering the closing panel NOTE: Do not lower the closing panel ❀ ❀ ➭ ➭ ❝ ✿ ❛ below the dashboard on the passenger!s further than necessary as it could be ✪ ✭ ✰ ✻ ✻ ✱ ✱ ✪ ✬ ✺ ✯ ✻ ✭ ♦ ✽ ✬ side. damaged. F1 20 Driver!s door F2 20 Passenger!s door F3 25 Lights F4 20 Lights F5 35 Body F6 35 Body F7 35 Alarm F8 3 Off Board AM/FM Tuner F9 3 USB AUX Module F10 10 Air conditioning 2. Remove the two front screws (1) . 5. Remove the appropriate fuse and 3. Remove the side fixing clip (2) . replace it with a fuse of the same value F11 3 Alarm Control Unit as the original. If in doubt, check the fuse NOTE: If you wish to lower the closing F12 3 Tracker specification chart. panel fully, also remove the two clips at the rear (3). 6. Raise the closing panel into position, fit F13 7.5 Alarm the clip and fit and tighten the two front F14 10 Instrument cluster screws. ➨ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ USES

Battery fuse box ❀ ❀ ❈ ● ❈ ✽ ✽ ✪ ✬ ❤ ✪ ✽ ✯ ✫ ✮ ✭ ✩ ✪ ✻ ✻ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✤ ✥ ✍ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✧ ✍ ✒ ✌ ✗ ✟ ✠ ✝ ✡ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✌ ◗ ☛ ✡ ✳ ✳ ❑ ✳ ❑ remove any items stowed inside.

3. Open the top of the battery access cover 5. Press the 2 catches on the right-hand and disconnect the 2 electrical side of the cover and remove the cover connectors on the back of the cover. from the fuse box. 4. Lift the battery access cover upwards, off 2. Remove the 2 screws securing the top of its locating pegs, and remove. the battery access cover. ♥ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❋ USES ➭ ❈ ❀ ● ❀ ❀ ❈ ❈ ✽ ✸ ✪ ✬ ✪ ✬ ✽ ✱ ❤ ✱ ✻ ❅ ✯ ✫ ✱ ✫ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✭ ✯ ✫ ✮ ✭ ✩ ✪ ✻ ✻ ❀ ❀ ➭ ➭ ❝ ✿ ❛ ✪ ✰ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✱ ✱ ✪ ✬ ✺ ✻ ✯ ✭ ♦ ✽ ✬

1 - - 2 - - 3 30 Air Conditioning - Motor - Control Module 4 50 Secondary Fuse Box Supply 5 20 Electronic Stability Control valves 6 40 Electronic Stability Control ✤ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✓ ✦ ✡ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✥ ✠ ✑ ✌ ✡ ◆ ✒ ✧ ❼ ✡ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❘ replace it with a fuse of the same value motor as the original. If in doubt, check the fuse 7 20 Auxiliary Power Socket - specification chart. Luggage Compartment 7. Engage the left-hand side of the cover with the fuse box, and push the right- 8 40 Secondary Fuse Box Supply hand side down to fully engage the clips. 9 100 Electro Hydraulic Power 8. Refit the battery access cover, connect Assisted Steering the 2 electrical connectors and secure with the 2 screws. 10 200 Main Fuse Box Supply 9. Stow the contents removed from the 11 - - luggage compartment. ✷ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

IGHTING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➸ ➻ ➃ ➂ ➇ Vehicle lights ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✦ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✝ ✟ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✧ ✟ ✥ ✌ ✠ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✥ ✒ ✟ ✌ ✞ ✔ ✑ ✥ ❑ ❑ ✳ ✳ safety. You must ensure that all lights are working at all times. All the external lights on your McLaren use the latest Light Emitting Diode technology. Unlike traditional filament bulbs, these lights have a long life and low power consumption while providing the same amount of illumination. ❐ ➭ ✿ ❈ ❈ ✽ ✪ ✼ ✰ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✧ ❳ ✥ ✌ ✤ ✞ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✥ ✦ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ✳ ✳ ❋ Diode headlamps. These provide greater visibility on both dipped and hi beams, especially during adverse weather and driving conditions. NOTE: Do not attempt to change Light Emitting Diodes yourself, as you could damage the vehicle lighting systems. In case of failure, contact your McLaren Retailer. ▲ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ANUAL U NLOCKING A ND O PENING ➃ ➁ ➂ ➁ ➀ ❿ ❾ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➃ ➁ ➂ ✑ ➆ ❾ ➇ ➁ ➇ ➄ ➁ ➄ ➾ Unlocking - discharged battery ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✝ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✝ ✓ ✒ ✠ ✍ ✒ ✒ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ✵ ✵ ❍ ✴ ➭ ➭ ❀ ❈ ❀ ✪ ✹ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✬ ✯ ✬ ✹ ✬ ✭ ✸ ✰ ✼ ✸ ✰ ✱ ✪ ✪ ✸ ✸ ❥ ➍ because the vehicle battery or key fob battery has become discharged, use the mechanical key. NOTE: In the event of an extremely low state of battery charge, the windows will lower slightly so that the left-hand door can be opened with the manual key. The alarm system will be disarmed to prevent the alarm sounding. ✡ ✤ ✥ ✍ ✔ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✧ ✡ ✓ ✤ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✗ ✟ ✔ ✓ ❍ ✳ 2. Release and remove the mechanical key the back cover away from the key fob. from the key fob. ❖ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ANUAL U NLOCKING A ND O PENING ✤ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✝ ✝ ✒ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✔ ✍ ✥ ✟ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✑ ✝ ✡ ✧ ✚ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❋ ✵ 5. Insert the mechanical key into the slot 6. Insert the mechanical key into the lock the door on the sill panel, underneath a on the removed panel. and, using the attached panel for removable panel. leverage, turn the key until mechanical 4. Remove the panel by placing your resistance is preventing full release of fingers in the recess and pulling the door. outwards. 7. Apply pressure to the latch area of the NOTE: The panel is not tethered to the door (to counteract pressure of the door vehicle and can be removed completely. seals), and turn the key further to release Ensure that the panel is stored safely and the door cannot be damaged when the NOTE: If the vehicle battery is discharged mechanical key is used. and if the windows have not lowered. Take care when opening or closing the ❫ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ANUAL U NLOCKING A ND O PENING

Starting the vehicle Door opening from inside - discharged battery ➡ ➞ ➙ ➛ ➠ ➞ ➡ ➞ ➞ ➜ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➛ ➤ ➡ ➞ ✃ ➣ ➞ ❞ ➙ ➡ ➞ ➞ ➞ ➜ closed, the door seals or window could be damaged. 8. Fit the mechanical key back into the key fob. NOTE: Unlocking the vehicle using the mechanical key will activate the anti- theft system and may cause the alarm to sound. Once the door is open, place the key fob on the section of the cup holder housing immediately behind the switch panel. within 10 seconds. The vehicle will recognize the key fob and stop the alarm ✠ ✤ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✝ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✑ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✝ ✦ ❄ ✌ ✑ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✦ ✟ from sounding. ✳ ♠ ✵ ✴ ❍ ✴ ❍ ❍ and the engine will not start, place the key fob ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✤ ✡ ✥ ✠ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✧ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✤ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✠ ✒ ❚ 9. If the key fob battery has become ♠ discharged, replace the battery at the on the section of the cup holder housing manual door release strap retainer and pull earliest possible opportunity, see immediately behind the switch panel. the strap. Replacing key fob battery, page 5.28. In this position the vehicle is able to sense the The door latch will then release, allowing the 10. Replace the cover panel. presence of the valid key fob and the vehicle door to be partially raised before it can be started and driven. automatically swings outwards and upwards. Replace the key fob battery at the earliest To refit the release strap, feed the strap into possible opportunity, see Replacing key fob its holder and snap the retainers into place. battery, page 5.28. NOTE: Only use this strap when the battery has become discharged. ❢ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ANUAL U NLOCKING A ND O PENING

Opening luggage compartment - discharged battery ➮ ➭ ➭ ❀ ➫ ➛ ➢ ➣ ✃ ➞ ➣ ➢ ↔ ➣ ➢ ➞ ➣ ➛ ➡ → ➔ ➙ ➛ ➛ ➔ ↔ ➛ ➝ ✒ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ ✪ ✹ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✯ ✬ ✭ ✸ ✰ ✪ ✪ ➯ ➯ ➬ ➮ retainers on the manual door release ➞ ➣ ➣ ➡ ➤ ➙ ↔ ➛ ➛ ➠ ➟ ➛ ↔ ➢ ➟ ➐ ➛ ➟ → ➞ ➝ ✃ ➡ ➞ ✠ ✒ ✒ ✤ ✤ ☛ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✑ ✗ ✔ ✓ ➩ strap are fitted correctly, and in the button on the center console will not aperture. correct positions on the B-Pillar after release the luggage compartment if the 2. The luggage compartment will fully use. battery is discharged or disconnected. In unlock and open slightly. the event of this use the manual release NOTE: Please ensure that the manual 3. Lift the front of the luggage mechanism. door release strap is fully retracted compartment lid, the gas struts will before fitting the retainers to their B- support it in the fully open position. Pillar locations. ❦ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ANUAL U NLOCKING A ND O PENING

Replacing key fob battery ✔ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✧ ✠ ✎ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✡ ✗ ◆ ✡ ☛ ✌ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✦ ✟ ✌ ✥ ✴ ✵ ✴ ❋ ✴ ❍ ➋ ❍ You can do this yourself, or entrust it to your McLaren Retailer. When the key fob battery is discharged, you will only be able to unlock the vehicle with the mechanical key. You will require a single CR2032 3V battery. WARNING: The battery contains toxic substances. If a battery is swallowed, contact a doctor immediately. ENVIRONMENTAL: Do not dispose of the battery with the household waste. Batteries contain toxic substances. 1. Push against the thumb indent and slide 2. Unscrew the battery cover and remove Take the discharged battery to your the back cover away from the key fob. the discharged the battery. McLaren Retailer or to a recycling point for used batteries. ❧ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ANUAL U NLOCKING A ND O PENING ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✠ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✍ ✟ ✚ ✌ ✔ ☛ ❄ ✳ ♠ ✴ ❍ ❋ polarity is correct. NOTE: Handle the battery as little as possible. Moisture and oil from fingers can affect battery life and cause corrosion of the contacts. Only hold the battery on the edges. 4. Refit the battery cover, ensuring that the seal is seated correctly. 5. Refit the key fob the back cover. ➦ ✷ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ASHERS A ND W IPERS ➈ ❮ ➀ ❿ ➂ ❰ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➈ ❮ ➀ ➻ ➈ ➄ ❰ Replacing the wiper blades ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✽ ✱ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✻ ✱ ✸ ✹ ✱ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✪ ✭ ✯ ✽ ❊ ✸ ➳ ❈ ➭ ❡ ❈ ❜ ✿ ✿ ✼ ✪ ❤ ✰ ✱ ✭ ❣ ✪ ✬ ✪ ✸ ✱ ❅ ✻ ✪ ✪ ✲ ✬ NOTE: Never open the luggage switched off before you replace the compartment lid when the wiper arms wiper blades. The windscreen wipers are positioned away from the could be set in motion and injure you. windscreen. You could damage the WARNING: Replace the wiper blades luggage compartment lid and/or the every twelve months or the wiper arms. windscreen will not be wiped NOTE: Do not lower the wiper arms onto properly. You may not be able to the windscreen without the wiper blades observe the road and traffic fitted. conditions as a result and could cause ❈ ➭ ❈ ❈ ❈ ❡ ✿ an accident. ✼ ✪ ❤ ✰ ✱ ✭ ✻ ❣ ✪ ✽ ✼ ❣ ✼ ✸ ✸ ✪ ✱ ✱ ✸ ✬ ✡ ✧ ✑ ✠ ✌ ✟ ✥ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✑ ✒ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✗ ✤ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✍ ❙ ❋ ❑ ❋ ❑ ❍ ❈ ➭ ❈ ✽ ✼ ✪ ❤ ✰ ✱ ✭ ❣ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❥ ✭ and rotate 90°. ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✗ ✔ ✡ ✠ STOP/START button once to NOTE: Ensure the wiper blade is securely switch on the accessory mode but DO fitted in the wiper arm. ✡ ✝ ✥ ◆ ✠ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✤ ✡ ✒ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✌ ✥ ✗ ✔ ✒ NOT❋ ❑ touch❍ the brake pedal. 2. Lower the wiper arms onto the 2. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you park position on the windscreen see windscreen. twice, the wipers will move to a vertical Parking the wiper blades, page 5.30. winter park position and then to the 2. Lift the main wiper arm from the screen. 3. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you once, the wipers will move back to the diagonal service park position. 3. Rotate the wiper blade through 90° and normal park position. remove in the direction of the arrow. ➨ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

ASHERS A ND W IPERS

To remove the small wiper blade windscreen. You could damage the luggage compartment lid and/or the wiper arms. NOTE: Do not lower the wiper arms onto the windscreen without the wiper blades fitted. ❈ ➭ ❈ ✿ ❈ ❈ ❡ ✼ ✪ ❤ ✰ ✱ ✭ ❣ ✪ ✼ ✽ ✼ ✻ ✽ ✼ ❣ ✼ ✸ ✪ ✱ ✸ ✬ ✡ ✧ ✑ ✠ ✌ ✟ ✥ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✑ ✒ ✌ ✥ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✗ ✤ ✤ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✍ ❙ ❋ ❑ ❋ ❑ ❍ and ensure that the clip engages in the arm. NOTE: Ensure the wiper blade is securely fitted in the wiper arm. 2. Lower the wiper arms onto the windscreen. ✡ ✝ ✥ ◆ ✠ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✤ ✡ ✒ ✥ ✟ ✍ ✌ ✥ ✗ ✔ ✒ ❋ ❑ ❍ park position on the windscreen see 3. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you Parking the wiper blades, page 5.30. once, the wipers will move back to the 2. Lift the small wiper arm from the screen, normal park position. 3. Depress the wiper blade clip and slide it out from the arm. NOTE: Never open the luggage compartment lid when the wiper arms are positioned away from the ♥ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

HEELS A ND T IRES ➈ ➀ ❮ ➂ ➸ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➈ ➇ ➀ ➀ ➻ ❰ Wheels and tires ➭ ❀ ❈ ❝ ❈ ✾ ❐ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✻ ✸ ✭ ✬ ❣ ✪ ❊ ✲ McLaren recommends that you only use bodywork and axle components. This in axle pairs and ensure the tires are Pirelli summer or winter tires, See Wheel and could result in damage to the tires or fitted as specified. With worn tires, tire sizes, page 6.10. the vehicle. the driving stability of the vehicle will These tires provide the best possible NOTE: Retreaded tires must not be used. be adversely affected, especially performance in conjunction with the safety Do not fit used tires if you have no when driving at high speeds. systems on your vehicle and have been information about their previous usage. Consult your McLaren Retailer if you specifically approved by McLaren. NOTE: Modification to the brake system have had new tires fitted for McLaren cannot accept any responsibility for and wheels is not permitted, nor is the information on the appropriate damage that may result from use of other use of spacer plates or brake dust bedding in time based on your driving tires and wheels. Further information about shields. Any such modifications will style. wheels and tires can be obtained from your invalidate the vehicle warranty on the • With new tires, avoid high speed McLaren Retailer. area modified. cornering and excess speed. WARNING: Using tires other than NOTE: A wheel change must be carried • Only have wheels and tires of the those which have been out at your McLaren Retailer. The vehicle same type and make fitted. recommended by McLaren, may could be damaged if it is jacked up • Never use a tire which has been contact the body work and adversely incorrectly punctured and then repaired. affect the handling. This may cause NOTE: Store tires in a cool, dry place, • Only have tires of the correct size loss of vehicle control, resulting in preferably in the dark. Protect the tires fitted. serious personal injury or death. from oil, grease and petrol. • Tires degrade over time due to the Noise levels and fuel consumption effects of ultraviolet light, extreme may also be adversely affected. In temperatures, high loads, and addition, when driving with a load or environmental conditions. It is when using snow traction devices, recommended that tires are replaced they could cause contact between the every six years, or sooner if required. ✷ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

HEELS A ND T IRES ❀ ✿ ❛ ✿ Tire markings 6. Displays the maximum load which can ✽ ✪ ✱ ✭ ✭ ✱ ✻ ✮ ✻ ✽ ✪ be carried by the tire. 7. Treadwear grade number. The higher the figure the longer a tire will last. 8. The alpha character denotes resistance to heat. An "A! rated tire offers most heat resistance. 9. Information about the manufacture of the tire. Contains place and date of manufacture. ❡ ✽ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✿ ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✪ ❤ ✽ ✻ ✪ ✭ ✽ ✱ ✻ ✯ ❊ ✪ ❅ mounted according to the labeling on the tire wall. The word "OUTSIDE! ✔ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✟ ✌ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✟ ✡ ◆ ✟ ✑ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✧ ☞ ✧ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✥ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✧ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✗ ✤ ✥ ❯ ❑ ✴ must be on the outer edge of the tire 2. Tire profile given as percentage of tire when it is fitted to the wheel or the different from one side of the tread to the width. stability of the vehicle will be other. This combination of tread offers better 3. Indicates that the tire is radial ply. adversely affected, especially at high grip in both wet and dry conditions. 4. Indicates the diameter of the wheel rim speeds. The outer tread features a larger stiffer tread in inches. pattern that aids with cornering stability. The 5. The numbers denote load index and the inner tread pattern aids stability in wet letter indicates the speed rating. 91 conditions. A central groove in the tire aids indicates a weight of 1,350 lbs (615 kg) straight line stability. and Y indicates speeds over 186 mph (300 kph). ▲ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

HEELS A ND T IRES ❀ ✿ ✿ ❝ ✾ ➫ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✰ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✰ ✬ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✻ ❊ ✮ ✼ ✸ valve. In order to avoid damage to the by McLaren are to be fitted to the sensor, the tires must be replaced using vehicle. the correct procedure. WARNING: The tires must be WARNING: Tire grip decreases rapidly mounted according to the labeling on on wet or icy roads, particularly when the tire wall. The benefits of the tread depth is close to the asymmetric tires will only be minimum. You could lose control of available if the tires are fitted the vehicle and cause an accident due correctly. to the reduced grip of the tires. Reduce your speed and drive with ❈ ✾ ➭ ❀ ✽ ✪ ✭ ✱ ✻ ✽ ✼ ✰ ✪ ✸ ✪ ❅ ✽ ❣ ✸ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ✻ greater care. ✔ ✌ ✓ ✝ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✡ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✑ ✑ ✏ ✌ ✡ ✝ ✗ ◆ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✌ ☞ ♠ ✴ ✵ ✴ ♠ NOTE: If tread wear is uneven across the punctures, tears, bumps, deformation and tire, or becomes excessive, the wheel cracks. Check wheels for severe corrosion. When the tread is worn to 1.6 mm, the wear alignment should be checked. Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tire indicators appear on the surface of the tread pressure. Regularly check the pressure of all your tires pattern, producing a continuous band of and correct the pressure as necessary, see Regularly check the tire tread depth and the rubber across the width of the tire. Tires must Tire pressures, page 5.35. condition of the tread across the whole width be replaced as soon as the wear indicator of the tire. Turn the front wheels to full lock in becomes visible, or sooner if legislation All wheels must have a valve cap fitted to order to inspect the inner tread. dictates replacement at a greater tread depth. protect the valve against dirt and moisture. ➭ ❈ ❀ NOTE: It is recommended that you ✽ ✸ ✹ ✬ ✱ ✸ ✱ ✻ ✪ ✭ ✲ ✯ ✱ ✭ ✶ always have your tires replaced by your ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ☛ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✞ ✝ ☛ ▼ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✑ ✓ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✒ ❯ ♠ ❑ ✵ ✴ ✳ McLaren Retailer. Each wheel has a tire tires do not contact the kerb or other pressure sensor connected to the tire obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, ❖ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

HEELS A ND T IRES ❡ ➭ ✒ ✍ ✔ ✤ ✍ ✡ ☛ ◆ ✥ ✔ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✤ ✒ ✧ ✠ ✑ ✓ ✌ ✒ ✑ ✒ ✔ ✤ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✽ ✪ ✭ ✯ ✽ ✪ ✭ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ ❋ ✴ ♠ ❑ ❑ ❑ For the tire pressures for various operating ❝ ✾ ❡ ❝ ❞ ➭ ❜ ❛ ❵ approach the obstacle at a shallow❊ ✪ ✭ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ angle or sure that is too conditions, see Tire pressures, page 6.11. the tires could be damaged. high or too low has a negative effect They are also printed on a label attached to While driving, pay attention to vibrations, on the vehicle!s active safety, this the fuel filler flap. noises and unusual handling characteristics, could lead to an accident. Frequently If the vehicle is to be driven at high speeds, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that check the pressure of all tires, the tire pressure must be checked, and if the tires or wheels are damaged. If you particularly prior to long trips, and necessary adjusted. correct the pressure as necessary. experience anything unusual, reduce your NOTE: In some markets, the tire pressure speed and stop the vehicle as soon as safety WARNING: If the pressure in a tire label is attached to the base of the permits to check the tires and wheels for drops repeatedly, inspect the tire for driver!s side B-post. damage. If you find no signs of damage, have foreign objects or signs of punctures, the tires and wheels inspected at your check the valve for air leaks. NOTE: Tire pressures given for low loads McLaren Retailer. are minimum values which offer optimum ride comfort. Increased pressures for higher loads will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle, but ride comfort will be impaired. Check the pressures when the tires are cold. If it is necessary to check the tires when they are warm, pressures will be higher. Do not let air out of warm tires to match the recommended cold tire pressures. ❫ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

HEELS A ND T IRES

Deflated tire ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✦ ✒ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✤ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✌ ➥ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ❑ ❑ ❋ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✑ ✑ ✒ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✑ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✥ ◆ ✥ ✠ ❈ ❈ ✳ ❑ ❋ ❉ ✳ ✪ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✸ ✱ ✻ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✱ ✽ ➍ too low can: sealant, which is located in the luggage compartment. • create a risk of tire failure with resultant accidents, causing injury or death In the event of a puncture, follow the steps • shorten the life of the tires below to ensure your safety and the safety of other vehicle occupants and other road users. • cause increased tire damage • ➭ ❜ ❀ ❈ ❈ ➭ have a negative effect on handling ✪ ✸ ✹ ✭ ✸ ✯ ✯ ✱ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✱ characteristics (e.g. by causing ✟ ✠ ✟ ✟ ✦ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✔ ✒ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ✗ ◆ ✒ ✌ ✡ ❙ ✑ ✌ ❋ ✴ ❍ ❑ ❑ aquaplaning) from traffic and on a firm and level ENVIRONMENTAL: Check tire pressures surface. at least every 14 days. 2. If on a public highway, switch on the hazard warning lamps, see Hazard ❀ ✾ ❈ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✪ ❅ ❣ ✭ ✹ ✪ ✸ ✱ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✸ warning lamps, page 1.44. ❝ ✾ ➭ ➫ ➭ ❝ ❞ ❈ ❜ ❛ ❵ ❅ ✻ ✱ ❣ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✪ ❅ ❣ ✰ ✪ ✲ ✬ ❊ ✮ ✭ ✼ ✸ 3. Passengers should exit the vehicle safely winter tires can be✍ ✍ fitted✟ ✧ ✔ ✍ ✟ to✡ ✔ your✒ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✡ ✔ and✓ ☛ ✟ remain✝ ✓ ✒ ❴ well away from the vehicle, punctures, particularly those in the tire!s McLaren as alternatives. the road and any traffic. tread. The tire sealant can be used at ambient 4. Apply the parking brake and select temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C). neutral. WARNING: The tire sealant is unable 5. Place the warning triangle at an to seal punctures if: appropriate distance from the vehicle to warn other traffic of a breakdown, see • there are cuts or punctures in the tire Warning triangle, page 5.10. greater than 4 mm • the rims are damaged ❢ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

HEELS A ND T IRES

➲ you have driven at very low tire WARNING: Keep the tire sealant out of pressures or with deflated tires reach of children. If tire sealant is Contact your McLaren Retailer swallowed, immediately rinse the immediately. mouth thoroughly and drink a large amount of water. Do not induce Remove the tire sealant from the luggage vomiting. Contact a doctor compartment and follow the instructions on immediately. Do not inhale tire the container. sealant fumes. NOTE: If possible, locate the cause of the NOTE: After using tire sealant, the tire puncture and position the wheel so the valve, incorporating the Tire Pressure puncture is at the lowest point to enable Monitoring System sensor, will have to the sealant to be more effective. be replaced. Have the punctured tire replaced as soon as possible. WARNING: Have punctured tires replaced. McLaren do not recommend that punctured tires are repaired. WARNING: If the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water, change out of clothing which has been in contact with the tire sealant. If an allergic reaction occurs, contact a doctor immediately. ❦ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❱ EHICLE C ARE ➀ ❮ ➄ ➆ ➀ ➇ ➆ ➂ ➻ ➀ Washing your McLaren ❈ ❃ ❀ ❂ ❈ ❈ ❐ ✸ ✪ ✭ ✭ ✯ ✬ ✮ ✹ ✸ ❣ ✱ ❅ ✰ ✽ ✸ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✧ ✒ ❙ ✕ ✞ ☞ ❚ ❲ ❳ ❲ ❳ ▼ ❄ ❲ ◗ ✳ ❘ sponge, use generous quantities of ✤ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✤ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✔ ✟ ✟ ✑ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✒ ✥ ✠ ♠ ✵ ✳ ❋ products contain chemicals that are water paying particular attention to hazardous to the environment. Always place the key out of range (at least 9.8 feet areas where dirt can accumulate. Use take precautions to prevent fluids from (3 meters) or greater distance) to ensure that one wash mitt for the top of the vehicle spilling and never use excessive the doors do not open. (roof, luggage compartment lid and areas above the wheel arch line) and a quantities. NOTE: Do not wash the vehicle in direct separate mitt for areas below the wheel sunlight or if it is hot to the touch, this arch line. may cause water marks and streaks. NOTE: Do not clean the wheels with Do not wash the engine with hose pipe these wash mitts. or pressure washer. NOTE: Do not allow the shampoo to dry, Do not use household detergents, these it will leave streaks on the paint work. products will discolor painted surfaces and remove protective wax finishes. 4. Tar spots and stubborn grease marks can be removed using white spirit or 1. Pre-rinse the body thoroughly with a denatured alcohol. After cleaning, hose pipe held at a shallow angle to immediately wash the area with soapy loosen any dirt and wet the paintwork water to remove all traces of spirit or ready for washing, avoiding direct spray alcohol. on engine cover vents. 5. Once the vehicle is clean, work from the 2. Prepare a bucket of warm water and a top of the vehicle down and rinse the good quality car shampoo. Refer to the vehicle thoroughly using a hose pipe shampoo manufacturer!s instructions held at a shallow angle, avoiding direct for dilution ratios. spray on engine cover vents. 3. Working from the top of the vehicle 6. Dry the vehicle using a chamois leather down, wash the vehicle, ideally using a or drying towel. lambswool wash mitt rather than a ❧ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❱ EHICLE C ARE ➲ ➷ ❈ ❵ ❈ ❈ ➭ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➙ ↕ ➡ ✃ ➛ ➞ ➣ ➔ ↔ ➙ ➟ ↕ ➔ ✃ ➞ ➛ ➔ ↔ ➤ ➒ ➑ ➙ ➐ ➏ ➎ ✪ ✽ ✽ ✼ ✭ ✪ ❤ ❤ ✯ ✭ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✰ ❤ ✰ ✱ ✸ ✭ ✪ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❅ ✽ ✱ ✼ ✬ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✓ ✔ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✓ ✠ ✠ ✡ ✤ ☛ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✟ ✍ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✑ ☛ ✠ ✥ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✒ ✟ ✑ ✓ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✟ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✔ ✟ ✝ ✝ ◗ ✳ ❍ engine❍ ❁ ❋ bay,❑ ❍ it is advised to drive the ❋ ❑ ✵ ✳ ❑ ✴ vehicle and warm the engine to warm water and a good quality car shampoo good quality polish, following up with a operating temperature to dry off any only. Do not use petroleum or alcohol-based protective wax. excessive water from the engine. cleaners. NOTE: Do not use cutting compound, color restoration products or polishes ❈ ❵ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✪ ❅ ❣ ✪ ❅ ✻ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❅ ✽ ❈ ✿ ❀ ❵ ✽ ✽ ✰ ❣ ✭ ✸ ✬ ✬ ✭ ✰ ✭ ✱ ✸ ✱ ❣ ✐ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✰ ✪ ✭ ✸ ✱ containing a harsh abrasive. These can ✌ ✓ ✒ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✔ ✒ ✍ ☛ ✍ ✤ ✥ ✟ ☛ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✡ ✠ ✍ ✡ ✟ ✝ ✍ ✓ ❋ ❋ ❘ ✴ ✳ ➬ ➲ ➞ ➝ ➜ ➣ ➛ ➙ ➡ ➛ ✃ → ➔ ➝ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➛ ➣ ➒ ➢ ➢ ➑ ➔ ➐ ↔ ➏ ➎ scratch the surface and permanently using a window cleaning solution. An not allow brake dust to become damage the paint work. ingrained in the wheel rim finish. automotive glass cleaner is recommended. After washing the vehicle with car shampoo ❈ ❀ ❈ ❀ ❈ ✿ ❈ ❈ Wash the wheels using warm water, a good ✸ ✬ ✱ ✪ ✱ ✻ ✭ ✫ ✪ ✱ ✹ ✻ ✰ ✰ ✸ ✻ ✸ ✱ containing wax, clean the outside of the ✟ ✧ ✡ ✟ ✡ ✌ ✤ ☛ ✑ ✠ ✥ ✠ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✍ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✦ ✠ ✡ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✍ ✡ ✓ quality car shampoo and a wheel brush or ✳ ❋ ❑ ✵ ❘ ✴ ❑ ✳ windscreen with glass cleaner. Do not use wash mitt that is used only on the wheels. Any stone chips or deep scratches should be abrasive cleaning compounds as mirror glass Apply polish to non-satin finished wheels to repaired as soon as possible. Contact your is particularly susceptible to damage. assist in keeping them clean. McLaren Retailer for advice. ❀ ❈ NOTE: Never apply polish to satin finish✮ ✰ ✹ ✪ ✬ ✸ ✼ ✱ ❤ ✸ ✭ ✪ ✰ ✸ ➍ ✡ ✝ ✥ ✒ ✤ ☛ ✔ ☛ ✍ ✟ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✒ ✌ ✔ ✤ ✟ ✒ ✠ ☛ ✒ ✤ ✡ ✔ ✓ ✌ ✍ ✟ ❙ ❋ wheels, this will result in localized glossy patches on the surface of the wheel. during the winter can collect on the vehicle!s NOTE: Do not use acid based wheel underbody, if this is not removed, corrosion cleaners as these can damage the wheel can occur. During the winter months, rim finish leading to corrosion. regularly hose the underbody with water paying particular attention to the wheel NOTE: Ensure the brakes are fully dried arches and areas where dirt can accumulate. after the wheels have been cleaned before the vehicle is stored. ➦ ▲ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❱ EHICLE C ARE

Cleaning the interior ➲ ➮ ➮ ✔ ✓ ➡ ➛ ➝ ➝ ↕ ➙ ➝ ↔ ↕ ↔ ➛ ➛ ➣ ➛ ➡ ➝ ➛ ↔ ✍ ➤ ◆ ➡ ➒ → ➑ ➞ ➐ ➏ ➎ ➭ ❈ ✿ ❀ ❈ ✾ ❈ ✽ ✽ ✱ ✸ ✰ ✽ ✯ ✼ ✽ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✰ ✻ ✪ ✮ ✸ ✭ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✸ ✭ ✪ ❤ ✱ ➉ ✸ ✺ ✬ ❤ ✭ ✧ ☛ ✟ ✥ ✤ ✔ ✓ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✓ ✍ ✝ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✠ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✍ to recommend✥ ✠ ✦ ✍ ✠ ✡ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✟ ✒ ☛ ✝ ✥ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✟ ◆ ✡ products✍ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ❬ for cleaning the ❑ ✳ ❁ ❍ ♠ ❋ ❍ ✴ ❍ ✳ interior of your vehicle. test the cleaning solution on a concealed cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaning products area. Clean with a propriety matt dashboard or polish. ❈ ❀ ➭ ❈ ❈ ✺ ✭ ✱ ✫ ✻ ✭ ✽ ✰ ✪ ❤ ✸ cleaner. Contact your McLaren Retailer for ☛ ✥ ☛ ✔ ✟ ✍ ✓ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ❬ ✳ ❑ tery, always test the more information. Do not use abrasive cleaning solution on a concealed area. Clean cleaning products or polish. with diluted upholstery cleaner and a clean ❛ ❈ ❈ ❀ ❆ ❈ cloth. ✻ ✼ ✸ ✭ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✔ ✟ ☛ ✡ ✌ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✒ ✠ ✟ ▼ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✑ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✥ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✧ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✓ ❋ ❉ ❃ ❈ ✭ ✪ ✪ ❅ ✻ cloth or a sponge with water, wring it ✡ ✑ ✌ ✠ ✌ ✍ ✡ ✔ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✟ ☛ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✟ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✟ ✍ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✦ ✡ ❬ ♠ ❋ ✴ ✳ thoroughly and run it over the whole cleaning solution on a concealed area. Clean Alcantara® material. Make sure not to wet it with warm water and a non-detergent soap or excessively; rinse the cloth or sponge and a proprietary leather cleaner. Dry with a dry, repeat as necessary. clean, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaning products or polish. Leave the material to dry overnight. Do not polish the upper surfaces of the Once the material has dried, in order to dashboard. Polished surfaces are reflective restore the material, brush it delicately with a and may interfere with the driver!s view. Clean soft bristle brush. with diluted upholstery cleaner, then wipe ➴ ❈ with a damp cloth. ✽ ✻ ✼ ✪ ✪ ❤ ✻ ✟ ☛ ✒ ✟ ✔ ✑ ✡ ✍ ✌ ✥ ✧ ✝ ✠ ✟ ✤ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✌ ✑ ✍ ✌ ✡ ✤ ❳ ☛ ✡ ✌ ✴ ❑ ❋ ❋ ❍ ❏ water only. Do not use any type of detergent or chemical cleaning product. Allow the belts to dry naturally while extended, preferably away from direct sunlight. ➨ ❖ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

❱ EHICLE C ARE

Car cover ✒ ✟ ✦ ✌ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✡ ✔ ◆ ✒ ✝ ✠ ✟ ✝ ☞ ❍ ♠ r use inside a garage, can be purchased from your McLaren Retailer. McLaren recommends that the car is covered if it is to be left in storage for periods over two weeks. Clean the vehicle inside and out, ensuring that it has fully dried, prior to fitting the cover. NOTE: Allow the engine to cool before fitting the cover or the hot exhaust pipes could cause damage to the cover. ♥ ❖ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

AISING T HE V EHICLE ➀ ➇ ➆ ➂ ➻ ➀ ➀ ➻ ➸ ➃ ➁ ➂ ➈ ➂ ➄ ❮ Vehicle lifting points WARNING: Ensure the vehicle is correctly positioned on a jack or vehicle lift before raising the vehicle to a workable height. Always engage vehicle lift safety locks or use suitable stands to ensure your safety before working under the vehicle. ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✟ ✍ ✔ ✍ ✤ ☛ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✌ ✔ ✓ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ✦ ✡ ❍ ♠ ❘ vehicle, for correct lifting locations. Make this information available to any third parties who may be assisting in the recovery of your McLaren. NOTE: Lifting the vehicle at any other points will damage the vehicle. NOTE: Use a jack with a flat lifting platform and a rubber pad to protect the chassis from surface damage. Do not lift under a body panel. ✷ ❖ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

cLAREN A SSISTANCE ➀ ➆ ➁ ➄ ➸ ➈ ➂ ➈ ➈ ➄ ➁ ➀ ❮ ➄ ➇ ✕ ➾ McLaren Assistance Replacement battery In the event of a breakdown ✒ ✌ ✡ ✓ ✤ ✤ ✡ ✒ ★ ✥ ✍ ✧ ✥ ✧ ✥ ✔ ☛ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✡ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ✡ ✍ ✟ ✝ ✦ ✥ ✒ ✒ ✑ ✠ ✧ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✍ ◆ ☛ ✑ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✥ ✓ ◆ ✡ ✒ ✡ ✑ ✌ ☛ ❄ ✌ ✒ ☛ ✤ ✒ ✡ ✒ ✤ ★ ✥ ✍ ✧ ✥ ✧ ✥ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✦ ❄ ✓ ✒ ❍ ❍ ✴ ♠ ❑ ❍ ❋ ✴ ♠ ❍ ✴ attempt to make your own arrangements for a fault with the vehicle battery, the battery contact your McLaren Retailer. If your assistance. must only be replaced with a lithium ion McLaren Retailer is unavailable, contact the Refer to your Service and Warranty battery of the correct specification. Roadside Assistance Operator who is available documentation, this contains all the 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. information you need. NOTE: The contact details of your Roadside Assistance Operator can be found in your Service and Warranty booklet. The McLaren Retailer or Roadside Assistance Operator will verify your identity and that of your vehicle, as well as determining your exact location. They will then discuss the problem with you and, with your agreement, determine the best solution. ▲ ❖ ♦ ❫ MAINTAINING Y OUR M cLAREN

cLAREN A SSISTANCE

Towing for recovery ✒ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✤ ✟ ✥ ✡ ✓ ✑ ✌ ➥ ✥ ✡ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✠ ✓ ✒ ❴ ❋ ✳ ❑ ❑ ❋ 3. Remove the towing eye, stow it in the eye mounting only. luggage compartment and refit the NOTE: Do not tow the vehicle, doing so cover to the towing eye mounting as could damage the gearbox. The towing soon as the vehicle has been recovered. eye must only be used to winch the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for recovery purposes. Do not use a rigid bar to tow the vehicle. ❈ ✿ ❡ ✹ ✸ ✪ ✱ ✮ ✻ ✰ ✪ ✸ ✸ ✹ ✯ ✸ ✬ ✱ ❣ ✬ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✦ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✤ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✒ ✑ ✍ ❚ ✡ ✔ ✥ ✡ ❋ ✳ ✴ luggage compartment. 1. Remove the cover from the towing eye mounting in the front bumper. 2. Screw the towing eye clockwise into the mounting hole, ensuring that it is screwed in to the full extent of the thread. NOTE: To avoid damage to the towing eye and the vehicle, it is important to ensure that the towing eye is in full contact with the mating surface of the front structure. NOTE: A winch cable/strap must be secured to the towing eye only or the vehicle could be damaged. ❖ ❖ ♦ ❫

♥

♦

❢

✏

✏ ✎ ✎

✗

❼ ❼

6.3

❼ ❼

6.10

.... 6.7

. 6.13

...... 6.8

...... 6.11

...... 6.10

...... 6.6 ...... 6.13

...... 6.13 ...... 6.5

③

...... 6.12

①

✉

❶

...... 6.6

...... 6.4

❺

❶

......

...... 6.

O ⑩

......

③

......

⑩

✠

✉

✡

......

❸

❍

❷

⑨

✉

✧

④

②

✓

⑥ ❙

☛

③

☛

❶

③

✉

✒

✥

❶

③

✴ ②

✌

✉

✠

✟

❸ ✔

❷

✟

✌

✝

✔ ✥

⑨

⑩

✝

✦

✔

✥

✓

⑦

✌ ❷

✒

①

✍

✤

☛

⑨ ⑥

✳

✒

E ⑩

✡

✍

✠

✉

❺

✤

✟

✥

❑

❋ L ❋

❶

✝

①

✡ ✡

✥

✉ ✡

✡

✥ ✥ ✍

⑨

❶

☛ ✝

◆ ◆

✝

✥

✉

✠ ✠

✥

✑ ❶

◆

✉

✡ ✡

✑

✠

✝ ✇

◆ ◆

✡

✡ ✡

✇

❶ ⑥

Power steering fluid...... steering Power Coolant...... Brake fluid...... Fuel...... Maximum in gear...... speeds each ratios...... Gear Wheel and tireWheel and sizes ...... Turning circle...... Vehicle operating temperatures operating Vehicle ...... Engine oil specification ...... Engine ...... Vehicle dimensions...... Vehicle weights...... Tire pressures...... ❙

E ❚ ◗ ◗

①

① ①

V GENUINE McLAREN PARTSAND ACCESSORIES

⑩ ③ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

● ENUINE M cLAREN P ARTS A ND A CCESSORIES ➈ ➀ ➂ ❮ ❾ ➈ ➈ ➀ ➆ ➆ ➄ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➈ ➸ ❮ ➄ ❿ ➁ ➀ ❮ ➄ ➇ ✕ ➾ ➀ ➁ ➂ ➁ ➀ ➃ Overview ✡ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✌ ✓ ✟ ✒ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✤ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✧ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✴ ✴ Ensure that any accessories are suitable for genuine McLaren replacement parts and your McLaren. Accessories which constitute a accessories. The use of non-genuine parts modification to the vehicle could invalidate could have a detrimental effect on the the vehicle!s warranty. This applies if they: vehicle!s operation and safety. McLaren tests • change the vehicle type approved in the replacement parts and accessories, for warranty reliability, safety and suitability. McLaren • accepts no responsibility for the use of could endanger road users non-genuine parts on their vehicles, even if • adversely affect the vehicle!s emissions they have been independently approved. and noise levels In many countries, replacement parts and Always quote the vehicle identification accessories are only officially approved for number, you will find this on the vehicle installation if they comply with legal identification plate, and in the bottom left- requirements. All genuine McLaren hand corner of the windscreen. replacement parts and accessories meet these requirements. Genuine McLaren parts and accessories can be obtained from your McLaren Retailer where the parts will be professionally fitted. ✷ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

❱ EHICLE I DENTIFICATION ➁ ❾ ➂ ➸ ➄ ➆ ➂ ➼ ➂ ➸ ➁ ➀ ➅ ➂ ➀ ➇ ➆ ➂ ➻ ➀ Vehicle identification number ➭ ❈ ❝ ✾ ✼ ❱ ✪ ✻ ☛ ✟ ✧ ✝ ✓ ✡ ✠ ☛ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✦ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❍ found on the bottom left-hand corner of the

✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✦ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ on number plate also windscreen. contains the following: The number can also be found engraved on • maximum permitted laden weight the body behind the right-hand seat, stamped • on a plate at the base of the driver!s side maximum permitted laden weight B-post and viewed in the Vehicle Info section including trailer in the left-hand display, see Vehicle • maximum permitted front axle laden Identification, page 3.11. weight • maximum permitted rear axle laden weight ▲ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA ➄ ➸ ➄ ➅ Overview Vehicle operating temperatures ✠ ✟ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✝ ✡ ☛ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✍ ✍ ✟ ✔ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✑ ❚ ✴ technical data for your vehicle and applies to Minimum ambient -4°F (-20°C) the vehicle!s standard equipment. The data operating temperature may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further Maximum ambient +122°F (+50°C) information from your McLaren Retailer. operating temperature ➷ ➛ ➢ ➣ ➛ ➜ ↕ ➔ ➣ → ➞ ➜ ➛ ➔ → ➔ ↕ ➛ ➝ ➤ ↕ ➢ ➛ ➛ ➢ ➒ ➣ ➑ ✃ ➐ ➏ ➎ minimum and maximum ambient temperatures, performance degradation may be experienced. McLaren disclaims any liability of the stated engine power not being achieved if the vehicle is being used outside of the stated temperature ranges or being used at altitude. ❖ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA

Engine ❈ ❀ ✿ ✼ ✼ ✪ ❤ ✸ ✬ ✪ ✱ ✱ ✽ ✪ ❅ ✼ ✽ ✪ ✱ ❱ ➴ ➪ Engine - 540C ✪ ➨ ✸ ❦ ✱ ❫ ✹ ✸ ➳ Rated output (kW) 397 @ 7,500 Rated output (kW) 419 @ 7,500 @rpm @rpm Rated output (PS) 540 @ 7,500 Rated output (PS) 570 @ 7,500 @rpm @rpm Rated torque (Nm) 540 @ 3,500-6,500 Rated torque (Nm) 600 @ 5,000-6,500 @rpm @rpm Rated torque (lb-ft) 398 @ 3,500-6,500 Rated torque (lb-ft) 434 @ 5,000-6,500 @rpm @rpm Number of cylinders 8 Number of cylinders 8

Displacement cm 3 3,799 Displacement cm 3 3,799 ✤ ☛ ✓ ☛ ✒ ✟ ✦ ✟ ✝ ✍ ✡ ✍ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✧ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ ❍ Maximum engine 8,500 Maximum engine 8,500 permanently affixed to the underside of the speed (rpm) speed (rpm) service cover. Power to weight 412 Power to weight 434 The label contains: ratio (PS/tonne) ratio (PS/tonne) • engine displacement; • Acceleration 3.5 P Zero tires Acceleration 3.2 Corsa tires a statement of compliance with the (0 to 100 kph) (s) (0 to 100 kph) (s) appropriate model year US EA regulations; Acceleration 3.4 P Zero tires Acceleration 3.1 Corsa tires • the exhaust emissions standard. (0 to 60 mph) (s) (0 to 60 mph) (s) ❫ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA

Maximum speeds in each gear Gear ratios ✚ ✛ ✗ ✕ ✗ ✌ ✠ ✔ ✟ ✗ ✡ ❻ ✳ ✺ ➨ ❖ ❫ ➴ ➨ ❦ ❫

1st gear (mph (kph)) 48 (77) 1st gear (mph (kph)) 48 (77) 2nd gear 2.613:1 2nd gear (mph (kph)) 73 (117) 2nd gear (mph (kph)) 73 (117) 3rd gear 1.905:1 3rd gear (mph (kph)) 101 (162) 3rd gear (mph (kph)) 101 (162) 4th gear 1.479:1 4th gear (mph (kph)) 129 (208) 4th gear (mph (kph)) 129 (208) 5th gear 1.161:1 5th gear (mph (kph)) 165 (266) 5th gear (mph (kph)) 165 (266) 6th gear 0.906:1 6th gear (mph (kph)) 199 (320) 6th gear (mph (kph)) 204 (328) 7th gear 0.686:1 7th gear (mph (kph)) 186 (300) 7th gear (mph (kph)) 191 (308) Final drive 3.308:1 ❢ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA

Vehicle dimensions A Vehicle length 14 ft 11 in (4,530 mm) ➉ Vehicle width 6 ft 11 in (2,095 mm) Vehicle width 10 ft 7 in (3,225 mm) (doors closed, (doors open at B Wheelbase 8 ft 10 in (2,670 mm) including widest point) C Rear overhang 2 ft 7 in (786 mm) mirrors) K Vehicle height 6 ft 7 in (1,988 mm) D Front 3 ft 7 in (1,074 mm) G Vehicle height 4 ft (1,202 mm) (doors open) overhang (doors closed) ➯ ➯ ❞ ↕ ➛ ➣ ➞ ↔ ➡ ➠ ➠ ↔ ➛ ➡ ↔ ➔ ➙ ➞ ↕ ↕ ➔ ➜ ➙ ➝ ➛ ➝ ➓ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ E Ground 4 in (93 mm) clearance ❦ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA

Vehicle weights ➪ ❵ ✺ ✻ ➨ ❖ ❅ ❫ ✹ ✱ ✪ ➪ ❵ ✺ ✻ ➨ ❖ ❅ ❫ ✹ ✱ ✪

Dry weight (lbs (kg)) 2,978 (1,351) Maximum gross 3,734 (1,694) vehicle weight Unladen weight (all 3,188 (1,446) (GVW) (lbs (kg)) fluids and 90% fuel) (lbs (kg)) Maximum gross 1,728 (784) vehicle weight Kerb weight (plus 3,364 (1,526) distribution - front 165 lbs driver) (lbs axle (lbs (kg)) (kg)) Maximum gross 2,006 (910) Kerb weight 1,435 (651) vehicle weight distribution - front distribution - rear axle (lbs (kg)) axle (lbs (kg)) Kerb weight 1,929 (875) Maximum load - 110 (50) distribution - rear luggage axle (lbs (kg)) compartment (kg (lbs)) ❧ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA ➴ ➪ ❵ ➪ ➴ ❵ ✻ ➨ ❦ ❅ ❫ ✹ ✱ ✪ ✻ ➨ ❦ ❅ ❫ ✹ ✱ ✪

Dry weight (lbs (kg)) 2,965 (1,345) Maximum gross 3,719 (1,687) vehicle weight 3,174 (1,440) Unladen weight (all (GVW) (lbs (kg)) fluids and 90% fuel) (lbs (kg)) Maximum gross 1,722 (781) vehicle weight 3,351 (1,520) Kerb weight (plus distribution - front 165 lbs driver) (lbs axle (lbs (kg)) (kg)) Maximum gross 1,997 (906) Kerb weight 1,431 (649) vehicle weight distribution - front distribution - rear axle (lbs (kg)) axle (lbs (kg)) Kerb weight 1,920 (871) Maximum load - 110 (50) distribution - rear luggage axle (lbs (kg)) compartment (kg (lbs)) ➦ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA

Wheel and tire sizes ❵ ✽ ✪ ➘ ✱ ✽ ✼ ✪ ✪ ❅ Winter tires ✔ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✌ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✠ ➋ ✔ ✍ ✌ ✡ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✠ ✖ ✛ ✗ ❋ ➋ ❻ ❏

Rear wheels 10J x 20 - Pirelli SottoZero 3 225/35 R19

Summer tires Rear tires Front tires - Pirelli SottoZero 3 285/35 R20 - Pirelli P Zero MC1 225/35 R19 - Pirelli Corsa MC1 225/35 R19 Turning circle

Turning circle 41 ft (12.4 meters) Rear tires kerb-to-kerb - Pirelli P Zero MC1 285/35 R20 - Pirelli Corsa MC1 285/35 R20 ➨ ♥ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

ATA

Tire pressures NOTE: In some markets, the tire pressure Loading Front Rear label is attached to the base of the condition wheels wheels driver!s side B-post. Bar Psi Bar Psi Normal use 2.0 29 2.2 32 Speeds over 165 2.6 38 2.8 41 mph (270 kph) ✍ ✟ ☛ ✟ ✝ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✥ ✌ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ so be found on a label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. ♥ ♥ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

➶ ERVICE P RODUCTS, F LUIDS A ND C APACITIES ➈ ➀ ➂ ➸ ➂ ➆ ➄ ❿ ➄ ➆ ➅ ➁ ➄ ➈ ➅ ➂ ➇ ➼ ✗ ➈ ➸ ➆ ➅ ❾ ❮ ❿ ➀ ➆ ➂ ❮ ➀ ➈ Service products Engine oil specification Fuel ❈ ✿ ✿ ❈ ❝ ✾ ❝ ❞ ❜ ❛ ❵ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✒ ✍ ✒ ✥ ✝ ✒ ✍ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✡ ☛ ✓ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✝ ✓ ✡ ✤ ✝ ✥ ✒ ◆ ✠ ✠ ✡ ❙ ♦ ✪ ✼ ❤ ✼ ✫ ✮ ✼ ❅ ✹ ✱ ❅ ✽ ✱ ✼ ✪ ❊ ✯ ➉ ♠ ♠ ✳ ❑ and brake fluid. McLaren recommends that Fire, naked flames and smoking are you only use products tested and approved prohibited when handling fuels. for McLaren. Damage resulting from using Switch off the engine before ✌ ✟ ✥ ✝ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✥ ✒ ☛ ✡ ❳ ☛ ✥ ✎ ✏ ✍ ✟ non-approved service products is not covered✴ ❑ ✳ ✳ refuelling. by the liability for material defects. (9.0 liters) WARNING: Do not allow fuel to come WARNING: When handling, storing ➬ ➯ ➯ ➝ ➙ ➞ ➔ ➜ ➞ ➙ ➤ ➛ ➛ ➡ ➙ ➛ ➡ ↔ ✍ ➤ ◆ ➒ ➑ ➐ ➏ ➎ into contact with skin or clothing. and disposing of any service Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil. products, please observe the relevant Allowing fuels to come into direct regulations. Failure to do so could You may obtain further information from your contact with your skin or inhaling fuel endanger people and the McLaren Retailer. vapors is damaging to your health. environment. Do not allow service NOTE: Do not use any lubricant For more information about fuel, see products to come into direct contact additives. These could lead to increased Recommended fuel, page 2.49. with your eyes or open wounds. wear and damage to the mechanical ❈ Contact a doctor immediately if any assemblies. Damage caused by ✻ ❥ ✼ ✸ ✪ ✯ ➉ service product is swallowed. additives, which are not approved, is not ✌ ✟ ✥ ✝ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✟ ✌ ✒ ❚ ✛ ✗ ✍ ✟ covered by the McLaren warranty. ✴ ❑ ✳ ENVIRONMENTAL: Dispose of service (72 liters) products in an environmentally responsible manner. Capacity remaining when 2.9 gal. low level lamp illuminates (11 liters) ✷ ♥ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

➶ ERVICE P RODUCTS, F LUIDS A ND C APACITIES

Coolant Power steering fluid ☛ ✥ ☛ ✔ ✥ ✠ ✒ ❩ ✎ ✌ ✡ ✙ ☛ ✡ ✌ ✎ ✡ ✒ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✓ ◗ NOTE: To prevent damage to the engine,❁ ✳ ➋ ❑ ❋ ✴ Cooling system capacity 6.8 gal. only top up with a pre-mixed coolant fluid. (26.0 liters) that provides the desired level of antifreeze protection. Antifreeze/corrosion Mobil Extra Brake fluid inhibitor Antifreeze If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in ✤ ✥ ✓ ✍ ✟ ✦ ✠ ☛ ✥ ❬ ✡ ✔ ❚ ✒ ✗ ✒ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✍ ✔ ☛ ✓ ◗ the correct concentration, the boiling ✵ point❉ ➊ of ✴ Antifreeze quantity for 3.5 gal. the coolant will be around 266°F (130°C). The Over time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture protection to -4°F (-20°C) (13.0 liters) antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor from the air, this reduces its boiling point. concentration in the cooling system should ✡ ★ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✦ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✦ ☛ ✡ ✒ ✟ ✌ ✟ ✡ ✠ ✥ ✓ ✌ ✧ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✍ ✒ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✑ ❚ ♠ ❋ ❏ WARNING: If the boiling point of the be approximately 50% ±5%. This will protect and corrosion inhibitor. It performs the brake fluid is reduced too much, the cooling system against freezing in following functions in the cooling system: vapor pockets may form in the brake temperatures of -40°F (-40°C). • antifreeze protection system when the brakes are applied The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor hard (e.g. when driving downhill or • increased efficiency of the cooling concentration in the cooling system should track driving) impairing the braking system not exceed 55%, which provides antifreeze efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid • offers anti-corrosion protection protection down to -49°F (-45°C), as a higher must be replaced at the NOTE: Use Mobil Extra Antifreeze in all concentration will not dissipate heat as recommended service intervals. climates, all year round. If coolant is not effectively. used, the cooling system will not be If the vehicle is losing coolant, do not drive sufficiently protected from corrosion your vehicle and contact your McLaren and the cooling system efficiency will be Retailer. reduced. ▲ ♥ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

❚ ECHNICAL G LOSSARY ➽ ❮ ➄ ➈ ➈ ❾ ➇ ➃ ➇ ➄ ➆ ➂ ➁ ➻ ➆ ➀ ➸ Technical glossary ✿ ❈ ❀ ❀ ❀ ❛ ✸ ✼ ✮ ✱ ✬ ✰ ✭ ✽ ✻ ✪ ✸ ✲ ✱ ✬ ✻ ❀ ➭ ❈ ✽ ✱ ✹ ✱ ✰ ✸ ✭ ❣ ✱ ✪ ✩ ❥ steer will again gently apply the brake on the ✝ ✔ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✤ ✑ ✠ ✥ ✌ ❬ ☛ ✡ ✔ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✑ ✟ ✠ ✡ ❋ ✵ ❑ ✳ ❋ ❑ inside rear wheel, thereby restoring traction ✡ ☛ ✑ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✝ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✍ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✑ ✌ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✌ ☞ ✔ ✳ ❋ ✴ handling and performance characteristics of windscreen wipers are switched on. It and stability. the vehicle. prevents moisture build up on the brake discs ❀ during periods of heavy rain, by applying the✭ ✻ ✪ ✯ ✰ ✸ ✱ ✼ ✮ ✺ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✤ ✒ ✧ ✌ ✟ ✌ ✦ ✓ ✥ ✑ ☛ ✔ ✟ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✠ ✍ ✒ ✟ ✦ ✝ ☛ ✡ ✑ ❯ ❑ ✳ ✿ ➪ ❛ ➴ ❈ ❀ ✪ ✹ ✻ ✱ ✭ ✸ ✬ ✻ ✽ ✱ ✼ ✩ ✮ ✸ ❥ ❥ brakes momentarily, so that the pads touch engine speeds under hard acceleration within ✡ ✝ ✑ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✌ ✒ ✠ ✍ ✔ ☛ ☛ ❬ ✥ ✌ ☞ ☛ ✧ ❙ ✡ ✡ ✡ ◆ ✌ ✑ ✔ ✡ ❚ ✠ ➩ ✵ ✵ ✳ ✴ ❑ the discs. wheels from locking when you brake. This Sport powertrain mode, the number of firing ❈ allows the vehicle to be steered during ✭ ✪ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✭ ✪ ✩ ❥ engine cylinders are cut to rapidly decrease ✡ ✓ ➥ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✦ ✒ ✔ ✌ ✥ ✦ ✡ ✡ ✑ ☛ ✌ ✡ ✔ ✠ ✡ ✦ ✦ ✒ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✟ ✔ ✠ ❬ ✡ braking maneuvers.❍ ✵ the engine torque and engine speed allowing vectoring differential, but is integrated into faster upshifts to be achieved. This will make ❈ ❀ ❜ ❈ ❀ ❀ ❛ ✿ ✽ ✸ ✰ ✬ ✭ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✪ ✱ ✲ ✸ ✪ ✱ ✱ ✬ ✹ ✭ ✻ ✻ ✬ ✶ ✯ the braking system reducing weight and the upshift more audibly noticeable than a normal upshift. This also occurs in Track ☛ ✥ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✡ ✔ ✑ ✠ ✌ ✡ ☛ ✌ ✒ ✔ ✓ ✡ ✧ ✤ ✑ ✠ ✝ ✟ ✥ ✝ ✑ ☞ ✳ ❑ ❍ ❋ providing excellent speed of response. powertrain mode, but at high engine speeds it the vehicle or the Tracker system signals that If the system detects that the car is starting to is replaced by inertia push. See Inertia push, the vehicle is being moved without understeer through a corner, the inside rear page 6.15. authorization. brake is gently applied. This helps to increase the yaw rate of the car, making the car feel ❀ ❈ ❀ ➭ ➪ ✱ ✭ ✸ ✪ ✪ ❤ ✼ ✬ ❥ ✭ ✼ ✪ ➳ ✻ ✼ ✭ ✱ ✫ ✿ ❈ ❈ ✪ ✻ ✽ ✮ ✽ ✻ ✭ ✪ ✽ ✩ ✱ ❥ ✽ ✽ more resistant to understeer. The lateral "g! ✍ ✟ ✠ ✤ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✝ ✝ ✟ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✦ ❄ ❑ is suddenly released, ✝ ✠ ☛ ✡ ✡ ✧ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✒ ✟ ✠ ✧ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✌ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✔ ✟ ✟ ✠ ❬ ✡ ✴ ✳ ❑ ✴ ✵ force is also increased giving better handling braking situations. If you depress the brake the electronic brake pre-fill function characteristics. pedal quickly, Brake assist system immediately brings the brake pads into automatically increases the force being If the driver uses too much throttle exiting a contact with the discs, making for more rapid applied to the brakes and thus shortens the corner, the inside rear wheel increases speed, braking. stopping distance. which without brake steer could cause the car ➴ ❀ ❈ ❀ to become unstable. In this situation,✼ ✬ ✭ brake✻ ✸ ✬ ✺ ✮ ✻ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✼ ✱ ✸ ✪ ❤ ✼ ✬ ✭ ➳ ✻ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✝ ✟ ✠ ☛ ✌ ✥ ✟ ◆ ✤ ✥ ✌ ✌ ✥ ✠ ✔ ✍ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✟ ✔ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✥ ☛ ❙ ✒ ❳ ✧ ✳ ❍ ✴ ❁ between the tires and the road surface. ❖ ♥ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

❚ ECHNICAL G LOSSARY ❈ Global Positioning System engine and transmission speeds are✽ aligned✭ ✬ ✽ ✸ ✪ ✽ ✹ ✸ ✱ ❥ ✭ ✔ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✡ ✝ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✟ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✟ ✡ ✥ ✠ ✑ ✌ ✦ ✒ ✔ ☛ ✟ ❬ ✡ ✧ ✠ ✓ ✒ ✦ ✔ ✧ ✡ ✒ ✔ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✑ ✔ ✠ ✒ ❚ ✔ ✟ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✡ ✔ ♠ ❑ ❑ ❑ ✴ for a smooth❑ seamless✴ ❑ ✵ ✳ upshift. However, with satellite signals supply information on the inertia push, the clutch holding the next gear ultrasonic sensors in the front bumper, four geographical position of the vehicle. These is engaged with greater force and the engine ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper and two signals are compared with a digital map and speed is not allowed to decrease fully, sounders. When the parking sensors detect used both to determine the position of the therefore utilizing the inertia of its internal an obstructions while maneuvering, the vehicle and for its route guidance. rotating masses. This in turn provides a sounders provide an audible warning. torque impulse as the gear is engaged aiding ➴ ❈ ✿ ❀ ➴ ❀ ❈ ❐ ✪ ✺ ✯ ✭ ✸ ✬ ✺ ✫ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✫ ✱ ✪ ❅ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✹ ✻ ✸ ✸ ✱ ✼ ✬ ✰ ✸ acceleration and maximizing performance. ✑ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✍ ✍ ✑ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✥ ✌ ✦ ✥ ✑ ✔ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✍ ✓ ✟ ☛ ❙ ✟ ✔ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ✔ ✌ ✝ ✡ ✦ ✦ ✟ ✔ ✑ ✍ ✝ ✌ ✒ ✥ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✝ ☛ ✟ ✑ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❋ ❋ ♠ ❍ ❁ ❋ ✳

following vehicle characteristics: ✮ ✭ ✻ ✸ ➳ ✽ ✽ ✪ ✼ ✮ ✪ ➌ sound to indicate that an upshift is required ✝ ✡ ✒ ✍ ✑ ✌ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✌ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✥ ✠ ✤ ✡ ✠ ✒ ✍ ✌ ✑ ✍ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✔ ❳ ✔ ✡ ✔ ❭ ✡ ✍ ✵ • Adaptive damping✴ ❋ ✴ to maintain optimum performance. vehicle and disarm the alarm by simply • ESC settings ✿ ❈ ❈ ❜ ❈ opening the door when the key is within ✺ ✭ ❣ ✪ ✪ ✱ ✪ ❱ ✭ ☛ ✥ ✤ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✓ ✒ ✧ ✔ ✥ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✑ ✟ ✧ ❚ ✡ ✡ ✥ ✟ 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the❁ door❘ ➚ ❘ ❁ sensors.❋ ❀ ❐ ✼ ✬ ✭ ✰ ✻ ✼ ✸ ✬ ✬ ❅ ✼ ✼ ✱ the center of the rear grille. The live video ✍ ✍ ✥ ✑ ✝ ✍ ✍ ✟ ☛ ✒ ✠ ✒ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✍ ◆ ✒ ✡ ✠ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✤ ✍ ✒ ✑ ✍ ✍ ✥ ❩ ❍ ➩ ✵ ❑ ❈ ❀ ❃ ❀ ✼ ✸ ✬ ✯ ✭ ❅ ✻ ✸ ✬ feed is displayed on the IRIS screen when the starts. The brake system automatically applies ✡ ✑ ✌ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✤ ◆ ✥ ✥ ✡ ✔ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✔ ✥ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✑ ✝ ☛ ✓ ✟ ✞ ✳ ✳ function is active. the brakes until the accelerator is pressed. maximum acceleration performance from a ❈ ● ➴ ✿ ➴ ❈ standing start. ✪ ✬ ❊ ❤ ✭ ✽ ✻ ✪ ✫ ✽ ✱ ✪ ❅ ✼ ➭ ❈ ✾ ❅ ✽ ✱ ✯ ✻ ✭ ✪ ✸ ✍ ✟ ✤ ✔ ✌ ✠ ✓ ✡ ✦ ✥ ✘ ✟ ✤ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✡ ✟ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✥ ✔ ✡ ✍ ✧ ✟ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❑ ♠ ❍ ✳ ❏ ☛ ✥ ✍ ✍ ✟ ✝ ✡ ☛ ✤ ✡ ✒ ✑ ✧ ☛ ✥ ✝ ✟ ✒ ✠ ✟ ✌ ✠ ✠ ❚ ✡ ☛ ✥ ✑ ✌ ✥ ❯ ✳ ❋ ❑ ✵ ❋ ❈ ❡ ❃ ❀ ❀ ❈ ❂ ❡ ✿ ✸ ✪ ✭ ✭ ❥ ✪ ✮ ✼ ✭ ✪ ✻ ✪ clutch gearbox. Gear changes can be fully for an upshift at high engine speeds under ✠ ✌ ✧ ✡ ✔ ✡ ✌ ✧ ✔ ✡ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✡ ✠ ❚ ❚ ☛ ✡ ✠ ✟ ✞ ✝ ▼ ✡ ✑ ❚ ✴ ✴ ✵ automatic or driver controlled. The gear hard acceleration, inertia push delivers provides timing data recording and graphical changes are almost instantaneous. It is this greater acceleration. Under normal driving visualization for track use, e.g. circuits and coupled with uninterrupted torque delivery conditions, outside of inertia push when hill-climbs. from the engine which provides the relentless maximum performance is not called for, the acceleration. ❫ ♥ ♦ ❢ VEHICLE D ATA A ND G LOSSARY

❚ ECHNICAL G LOSSARY

Supplementary Restraint System ✠ ✥ ✟ ✟ ✦ ✧ ✒ ✓ ✔ ✑ ✠ ☛ ✝ ✡ ✥ ✟ ✑ ✔ ✧ ✡ ✒ ✔ ✝ ✥ ✠ ✧ ❙ ✡ ✌ ✔ ❍ ✳ ❍ ❋ ❑ ✴ are automatically deployed in an accident to provide additional occupant protection. ✿ ➴ ❂ ❡ ✪ ✹ ✻ ✸ ✽ ✱ ✭ ✮ ✬ ✪ ✻ ✭ ✱ ✯ ✸ ✽ ✪ ✬ ✭ ✽ ✱ ✪ ✭ ✍ ✌ ☛ ✟ ✌ ✔ ☛ ✒ ✝ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✧ ✒ ❙ ✌ ✡ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✔ ✒ ▼ ✡ ✠ ✓ ✔ ✔ ✡ ✠ ✡ ✠ ✥ ❚ ✴ ✳ ✴ checks the pressure and temperature in all four tires. It warns if the pressure drops or the temperature rises in one or more of the tires. ❈ ❝ ❀ ✿ ❀ ✾ ✸ ✬ ✱ ✱ ✻ ✫ ✯ ✱ ✭ ✻ ✱ ✪ ✸ ✪ ❅ ✼ ❤ ✪ ✪ ✰ ❱ ✡ ✓ ➥ ✥ ☛ ✓ ✟ ✧ ✔ ✥ ✓ ✠ ☛ ✡ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✦ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✤ ✥ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✑ ❚ ❍ 17 digit number which provides information about your vehicle, as well as when and where it was built. Typical vehicle identification number = SBM13AAA9GW005000 ❢ ♥ ♦ ❢

INDEX ✘ ✆ ✢ ✄ ✁ ✎ ✗ ✚ Anti-lock Braking System Anti-lock Braking System warning light A ✏ ✚ Anti-trap protection - windows 2.32 ✚ ✚ ✎ ✎ ✏ ➊

✎ ✗ ✎ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✥ ✍ ✔ ✠ ✟ ✒ ✤ ✒ ✌ ✡ ✟ ✠ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✝ ✝ ☞ Auto alarm ❑ ❑ bedding-in ✚ ✚ ✎ ✎ ✎ ✚ Auto door lock ❼ ✎ Accessories brake assist system ✚ ✚ ✎ ✎ ✎ ✚

✎ ✏ ✎ Auto fold mirrors Active dynamics panel brake disc wiping ✗ ✗ ✏ ✎ ✚ ✚

✎ ✏ ✎ Automatic light control active button brake steer ✗ ✙ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✚ Automatic locking ✎ ✎ handling ➊ control electronic brake pre-fill ✏ ➊ ✎ ✙ ✗

Automatic mode - climate control ✎ ✛ ✎ launch control foot ✎ ✗ ✎ Automatic mode - transmission ✎ ✚ ✚ ✎ ✘ ✎ powertrain control hill hold control ✗ ❼ ✏ Automatic wipe ✎ ✛ ✎ ✏ ✏ Active speed limiter parking ✎ ✙ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✏ setting an upper speed limit pedal ✎ ✙ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✎ Air bags B warning light ✎ ✚ ✚ ✗ ✚ child ➊ passengers Brake-steer ✚ ✏ ➊ ✗ ✎ ✡ ✠ ✔ ✡ ✓ ✌ ✒ ✦ ✌ ✟ ❬ ➊ ✴ ❍ ❏ ✗ ✚ ✚ deployment Breakdown ✚ ✎ ➊ ✗ ✎ ➊ ✗ ✗ ✚ front air bags fuses Bulb replacement ✏ ✗ ➊ ✎ ➊ ❻ ✗ ✎ ✚ knee air bags Battery replacement - key fob Bulkhead stowage net ✚ ✗ ➊ ✗ ✎ ✚ occupant classification system Battery safety ✚ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✚ Out Of Position (OOP) testing Battery status C ✗ ✘ ✎ ✗ ✙ ✚ replacement Belts - seat ✏ ✛ ✗ ✗ ✚ Blower speed - climate control ✏ ✎ ✗ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✡ ✌ ✟ ☛ ✧ ✒ ✥ ✥ ✍ ✌ ✥ ✝ ✍ ✟ ✟ ✠ side head air bags ➩ ❁ ❍ ✏ ✗ ➊ ✗ ✙ ✚

Boost starting ✎ ✘ ✗ system modification Camera ✎ ✎ ✚ Brake assist system ✏ ✙ ✗ ✎ ✗ Air distribution - climate control McLaren track telemetry ❻ ✎ ✎ ✚ Brake disc wiping ✏ ❻ ✎ ✘ ✗ Air recirculation mode - climate control rear view ❼ ✚ ✗ Brake fluid ✏ ✙ ✗ ❼ ✎ ✗ Air vents Capacities

❻ ➊ topping up ✗ ✏ ✗ ❼ ✚ ✗ Alarm cooling system ✎ ✙ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✗

Brake pedal ❼ ✎ ✗ arming engine oil Brakes ✗ ✏ ✗ ❼ ✎ ✗ disarming fuel tank ✎ ✗ ✚ Anti-lock Braking System ✗ ✏ ➊ ✗ ✏ panic ➊ Car cover ♥ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✎ ✗ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✠ ✡ ◆ ☛ ✒ ✝ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✌ ✟ ✏ ✎ ✗ ➊ ✴ ❁ calibration D ✎ ✗ ➊ ✏ ✏ high temperature controls ✏ ✘ ✗ ✏ ✘ ❼ ✏ ✟ ✌ ✟ Center console stowage compartment demisting ❉ ✚ ✎ ✚ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✚ ✏ Central display heated mirrors Daytime running lamps ✚ ✚ ➊ ✏ ✙ ✗ ✚ ❼ ✎ Electronic Stability Control display heated seats Defaults - vehicle settings ✚ ✚ ➊ ✏ ❼ ✏ ✘ gear position indicator manual mode Defrosting - climate control ✚ ✚ ➊ ✏ ❼ ✏ ✘ handling and powertrain display MONO mode Demisting - climate control ✚ ✎ ✚ ✏ ✘ ✗ ✚ ✚ normal mode switching on/off Deployment - air bags ✚ ✚ ✚ ❼ ✘ ✏ sport mode ❻ temperature Dimensions ✚ ✏ ✚ ✗ ➊ ✚ ✘ track mode Clock Discharged battery ❼ ✚ ✎ ➊ ➊ ❻ ✗ ✚ ✗ Changing wheels Closing the luggage compartment Discharged key fob battery ✎ ❼ ✎ ➊ ➊ ✗ ✎ ✗ Checking engine oil Closing the service cover starting the engine ✗ ✚ ➊ ✏ ✎ ➊ ✏ ✎ Child passengers Closing the windows unlocking ✗ ✚ ➊ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✚ ✎ Child restraint system Coolant Display ❻ messages ✗ ❼ ✚ ❼ ✙ ✏ ➊ KISI child seat function topping up Display screen➊ cleaning ✗ ✘ ✚ ✚ ❼ ✗ ✚ tether straps Copyright Display set-up ✚ ✚ ✗ ➊ ❻ ❻ ✗ ✗ ✗ Cleaning Cover - service external lighting ✚ ➊ ❻ ✗ ✎ ✗ ✚ ✛ ✗ exterior closing internal lighting ✙ ✏ ➊ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✚ ✘ ✗ instruments and display screens opening language ✙ ✏ ➊ ✎ ✙ ✏ ✚ ✗ interior Cruise control ❻ lighting ✛ ✚ ✎ ✗ ✏ ➊ ✚ ✘ ✗ wheels canceling time & date ✏ ✏ ✎ ✎ ✏ ✚ ❼ ✗ Climate control decreasing speed units ✏ ➊ ✎ ✎ ✏ ✗ ✛ ✚ air conditioning controls increasing speed Door mirror heating ✏ ✙ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✏ ✏ ✗ air distribution resuming speed Door stowage compartments ❻ ✏ ❻ ✚ ✏ ✎ ✎ ✙ ✏ air recirculation mode setting Door unlock ✗ ✎ ✏ ✙ ✗ ✏ ✗ air vents ❻ Cup holders Doors ✗ ✙ ✗ ✏ ➊ automatic mode automatic locking ✗ ✛ ✏ ✛ blower speed closing ✷ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✗ ❼ ✝ ✒ ☛ ✍ ✥ ✎ ✚ ✚ ✎ ✗ ✵ ✳ Electronic brake pre-fill temperature monitoring ➊ ✎ ✏ ✚ ✗ ✏ ✗ locking and unlocking from inside ❻ Electronic Stability Control ➊ Exit lighting ✎ ✏ ✚ ✗ ✙ ✏ ❼ ✎ manual opening from ➊ inside deactivating Exterior lighting ✎ ✚ ✗ ✚ ➊ ❻ ✗ ✛ opening from inside dynamic modes Exterior mirrors ✗ ✛ ✚ ✎ ❼ ✚ opening from inside - discharged battery reactivating heating ✗ ✗ ✎ ✎ ✗ 5.26 Emergency fuel filling ➊ funnel memory ✎ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✚ ✗ opening ➊ from outside Engine mirror automatic fold ✎ ✎ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✚ opening from outside - discharged battery Eco Start-Stop System mirror fold ✗ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✚ ✏ ✎ ➊ immobilizer reverse dip ❼ ➊ ✚ ✗ ❻ ✏ ✗ stowage compartment ❻ power output External lighting settings ✎ ✗ ✎ ✏ ➊ ➊ ✏ ✗ ❻ Drink holders running in Extinguisher ✎ ✗ ➊ ✎ ✗ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✗ Driving away starting Eye - towing ✎ ✗ ✗ ✎ ✙ ➊ Driving in winter stopping ❼ ➊ ✏ ✚ ➊ Driving precautions technical data F ✎ ✗ ✚ ✎ ✏ ✗ Driving safety systems warning light ✎ ✚ ➊ ✎ Dynamic ESC modes ➊ Engine oil ✗ ✎ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✠ ✟ ✍ ✝ ✡ ✤ ❁ ❁ ➋ ❼ ✎ ✗

capacity ✏ ✏ ✗ Features ✎ ➊ ✏ ✙ ✎ checking E 12V socket ✎ ➊ ✏ ✗ level warnings ❻ cup holders ❼ ✎ ✗ ✏ ✏ ✗ specification ✎ ✎ ✗ ✒ ✌ ✌ ✠ ❙ ✟ ✧ ❙ ✌ ✡ ❙ ✌ ✔ ✒ ✝ ❳ ➩ ❑ ✴ entry lighting ✏ ➊ ✏ ✗ ➊

✎ ✏ ✗ temperature warnings Economical driving exit lighting ✚ ➊ ✏ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✗ Electric seats topping up interior lighting ✎ ➊ ✗ ✙ ✎ ✏ ✘ ✗ backrest rake adjustment usage stowage compartments ✏ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✗ ✏ ✗ forward and rearward adjustment Entry lighting ➊ stowage net ✙ ✗ ➊ ✗ ✙ ✎

Equipment ✏ ✛ ✗ height adjustment sun visors ✙ ✗ ➊

✗ ✗ ✎ luggage compartment ✏ ✗ ✎ lumbar adjustment USB sockets ✚ ✛ Error messages ✗ ✗ ✎ ✎ ✘ ✏ Electric seats and mirror memory Filling with fuel ✎ ✗ ➊

✎ ✎ Exhaust ✎ ✗ Electrical status ➊ Fire extinguisher ▲ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✗ ✗ ✤ ✥ ✟ ✌ ✥ ✌ ✔ ✠ ✥ ➊ ✵ ➋ G I ❼ ✚ ✗ Fluid - brake ❻ ➊

topping up ✚ ✚ ✠ ✒ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✤ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✠ ✥ ✟ ✔ ✡ ✒ ❼ ✚ ✡ ✍ ✧ ✝ ✥ ✓ ✠ ✑ ☛ ✡ ✡ ☛ ◆ ✒ ✥ ✌ ✟ ✝ ✥ ✦ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✤ ❄ ➊ ♣ ❑ ❍ ➩ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✎ ✘ ✎ ✚ Fluid - power steering Gear positions Ignition - switching on ✘ ➊ ❼ ❼ ✗ ✏ ✗ topping up Gear ratios Immobilizer ✎ ✙ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✗ ❼ ❼ Foot brake Gear shift indicator In gear speeds ✗ ✎ ❻ ✎ ✙ ✎ ✗ ✛ ✏ Force limiters - seat belts Gearbox Increasing nose ground clearance ✗ ✗ ✚ ✎ ✙ ✎ ✗ ✛ ✏ Front air bags gear positions Increasing nose ride height ✎ ✘ ✏ ✗ ❻ ✎ ✚ ✎ Fuel gearshift paddles Individual unlock settings ✎ ✗ ➊ ✏ ✚ ➊

funnel ✎ ✗ ✎ kickdown Inspecting tires ✎ ✛ ✏ ✏ ✚ ➊

quality ✎ ✗ ✎ manual/automatic mode Inspecting wheels ❼ ✎ ✗ ✚ ✎ safety ➊ ➊ oil topping up Instruments ❼ ✎ ✗ ✚ ✎ ✚

tank ❼ ✎ Genuine McLaren parts and accessories central display ✚ ✘ ✚ ✙ ✏ ➊ ❼ ✏ ✗ Fuel level display Glossary - technical cleaning ✚ ✘ ✚ ✚ ❼ ✎ ❼ Fuel range display Ground clearance defaults ✎ ✗ ➊ ✚ ✎ Funnel - fuel display ❻ messages ✚ ✎ ✚ Fuse box display window H ✗ ✎ ➊ battery Electronic Stability Control mode display ✘ ✗ ➊ main 3.35 ✎ ✎ ✍ ✒ ✠ ✌ ☛ ✥ ☛ ✍ ✒ ✤ ✝ ☛ ✟ ❩ ➊ ✳ ✙ ✎ ➊ ✚ ✘ ✚ secondary fuel level display ✗ ✏ ✏ Hazard warning lamps ✘ ✗ ➊ ✚ ✘ ✚ Fuses fuel range display ✗ ✎ ✏ Headlamps ✗ ✎ ➊

battery fuse box ✚ ✚ gear position ➊ indicator ✗ ✎ ✏ flash ✘ ✗ ➊ main fuse box ✚ ✚ handling and powertrain display ➊ ✗ ✎ ✏ hi beam ✘ ✗ ➊

replacement ✚ ✘ home screen ✗ ✛ ✚ ✏ ✗ ✗ Heated ✱ mirrors ✙ ✎ ➊

secondary fuse box ✚ ✏ left-hand display ✗ ✚ ✎ ✏ ✙ ✗ ✱ Heated seats ✚ ✎ ✚ ✗ ✎ ✏ Hi beam normal mode ✚ ✎ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✚ Hill hold control nose lift ✚ ❼ ✚ ✗ ❼ ✎ Horn oil temperature display ❖ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✚ ✎ ✡ ✥ ◆ ✠ ✡ ◆ ✒ ✎ ✏ ✏ ✗ ❋ battery ➊ ❻ replacement courtesy lighting ✚ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✗ ✚ ✏ right-hand display discharged ➊ battery day time running lamps ✚ ❼ ✗ ✗ ✚ ✗ ✙ ✏ settings entry exterior ✗ ✗ ✏ ✏ ✚ ✚ ➊ speedometer stowing hazard warning lamps ✗ ✚ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✚ ✚ ✚ sport mode Keyless entry headlamp flash ✎ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✎ ✗ ✎ ✏ tachometer Kickdown hi beam ✗ ✗ ➊ ✚ ✏ ✚ ✏ ✏ ✗ track mode Kit - first aid interior ❼ ✚ ➊ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✚ ❻ trip computer Kit - tire repair lo beam ✗ ✎ ✚ ✗ ✏ ✚ ✛ ➊ vehicle info Knee air bags parking lights ✗ ✚ ✏ ✚ ❼ ✚ water temperature display rear fog lamp ✗ ✎ ✏ ❼ ✚ Interchanging ➊ wheels L sidelamps ✏ ✙ ✎ ✗ ✗ ✏ Interior accessory power socket switch ✏ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✏ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✧ ✟ ✞ ✡ ✔ ✤ ✥ ✔ Interior lighting ❑ ➩ turn signals ✏ ✏ ✗ ✚ ✗ ❻ ✚ ✘ ✗ courtesy lighting Language settings Lighting settings ✗ ✚ ❻ ✎ ✏ ✗ ✎ ✛ ✎ Interior mirror Launch control Limphome ✗ ❼ ✗ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✚ ✏ Interior motion sensor Left-hand display Lo beam headlamps ✚ ✛ ✗ ✗ ❼ ✚ ❼ ✎ Internal lighting settings defaults Locking ✎ ✗ ✙ ✗ ✚ ✘ Introduction home screen automatic ✗ ❻ ✚ ✎ ❻ messages from inside ✗ ❼ ✚ ✎ ✗ from outside J nose lift ✗ ✘ ✎ ✏ overview mislock ✏ ✚ ✗ ✚ ❼ ✗ ✎ ✏ ✡ ✍ ✝ ✥ ✑ ✡ ✝ ◆ ✟ ✖ ☛ ✥ ✡ ✑ ✌ ➊ ✵ ✳ settings Lo-Jack vehicle tracking system ✗ ✎ ✗ ✚ ❻ ✚ ✘ Journey trip trip computer Luggage compartment ✗ ✚ ✗ ✏ ✗ ✚ ✛ ➊ Jump starting vehicle info closing ✙ ✗ ➊ ✎ ✏ Lifting ➊ points - vehicle equipment ✘ ✎ ➊ ✗ ✗ ✏ Light switch manual opening K ✘ ✎ ➊ ✗ ✙ ✏ Lighting opening - discharged battery ✗ ✎ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✏ automatic control unlocking and opening ✗ ✚ ✡ ❭ ✒ ✦ ✴ ❍ ❫ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✡ ✔ ✌ ✟ ✓ ✡ ✍ ✡ ✠ ✍ ✟ ☛ ✠ ✡ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✌ ☛ ✡ ✧ ✓ ✧ ✒ ✌ ✞ ✟ ✠ ✝ ✟ ✡ ✗ ✛ ✚ ✗ ✗ ✛ ❍ ➩ ✳ ✳ ❑ ✳ reverse dip ✱ ➊ Opening a door ✗ ✛ ✗ ✚ ✗ ✗ ✘ ton Mislock from inside ✏ ❼ ✗ MONO mode - climate control ➊ from outside ✗ ❼ ✗ ✗ ✎ Motion sensor - interior Opening and closing M ✏ ✙ ✗ Opening and closing the vents ✗ ✗ ✗ Opening the service cover ✘ ✗ ✡ ✔ ✓ ✒ ✦ ☛ ✥ ✟ ▼ ➊ ❍ ❏ N ✏ ✎ Opening the windows ✘ ✗ ➊ fuses ❼ ✏ Operating temperatures - vehicle ✚ ✚ ✎ ☛ ✒ ✥ ✥ ✌ ◆ ✟ ✟ ❲ ✎ ✏ ✳ Main instruments overview ✚ ✘ Outside temperature display ✏ ❼ ✗ ✛ ✏ ✚ ✎ ✗ Manual mode - climate control ✱ Nose lift ✏ ✛ ✗ Owner documentation ✎ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✎ ✗ Manual mode - transmission accessing ✗ ✗ ❻ ✚ ✏ ✗ Manual seat backrest adjustment lower ✗ ✘ ✗ ✗ ✛ ✏ Manual seats operation P ✗ ✗ ❻ ✚ ✚ ✗ backrest rake adjustment raise ✗ ✏ ✧ ✠ ✟ ✍ ✟ ✝ ✥ ☛ ✟ ✗ ✘ ✗ ➊ forward and rearward adjustment ✎ ✛ ✗ ✗ height ❻ adjustment Parking brake O ✗ ✏ ➊ ✏ ✎ ➊ Manual unlocking Parking lights ✎ ❼ ✗ ✚ ✏ McLaren➊ Assistance Parking sensors ✚ ✘ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✒ ✤ ◗ ❼ ✎ ❼ ✎ McLaren parts and accessories Parts ✎ ➊ Oil - engine ✏ ✗ ➊ ✎ ✗ ✚ ✙ ✗ McLaren track telemetry ✱ ❻ Passenger!s footwell stowage net ❼ ✎ ✗ capacity ✗ ✚ ➊ ✏ ✗ ✎ USB sockets Passengers - child ✎ ➊ checking ✚ ✚ ✎ ✏ ✗ ✎ Media USB sockets Performance shift cue ✎ ➊ level ❼ ➊ ✗ ✚ ❻ Mirror Power output ✎ ➊ level warnings ❼ ➊ ✗ ✛ ✚ automatic exterior mirror fold engine ❼ ✎ ✗ specification ❼ ✚ ✗ ✗ ✚ ❻ exterior Power steering fluid ✚ ✙ ✗ status ✘ ➊ ✗ ✛ ✚ exterior mirror fold topping up ✚ ❼ ✚ temperature display ✎ ✘ ✎ ✗ ✛ ✚ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✱ heating Powertrain control ✏ temperature ➊ warnings ✏ ✚ ➊ ✗ ✚ ❻ interior Precautions - driving ✚ ➊ top up ✚ ❼ ✗ ✗ ✱ ➊ ➊ ✗ ✗ ✎ memory Pressures - tire

➊ ➊ Oil - gearbox ❢ ♦ ❦ INDEX ❼ ✎ ✗ ✡ ✝ ✥ ◆ ✔ ✠ ✌ ✡ ✝ ✔ ✓ ✤ ✒ ✠ ✚ ✎ ✎ ✗ ✎ ➩ Rev counter manual/automatic mode ❼ ✚ ✚ ✏ ✎ ➊ ✗ ✛ ✎ Puncture repair kit Reverse mirror dip Seat belt warning light ✚ ✚ ✎ ✗ ✘ ✎ Reverse select tone Seat belts ✚ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✎ Right-hand display ❻ force limiters R ✚ ✘ ✚ ✗ ✘ ✎ fuel level safety ✚ ✘ ✚ ✗ ✎ fuel range ❻ tensioners ✗ ✗ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✥ ✟ ✝ ✡ ✟ ✔ ❻ ✳ ❘ ✚ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✎ oil temperature ❻ wearing ✗ ✗ ❻ adjustment ✎ ❼ ✏ ✗ ✏ ✛ ✗ overview Seat stowage ✱ ❻ pocket ✗ ❼ ✏ Rain sensor ✚ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✘ ✗ water temperature Seats ❼ ❼ Ratios - gear ✗ ✙ ✎ ✎ ✏ ➊ Running in backrest - electric rake adjustment ✏ ✏ ✗ Reading lights ✗ ✗ ❻

✗ ✚ ✏ backrest - manual rake adjustment Rear fog lamp ✗ ✛ ✗ ✎ ✘ ✗ electric adjustment Rear view camera S ✗ ✙ ✎ ✏ Recirculation mode - climate control ❻ electric backrest rake adjustment ✎ ✛ ✏ electric forward and rearward adjustment ✗ ✘ ✎ ✌ ✡ ✦ ✟ ❙ Recommended fuel quality ✴ ✏ ✏ ➊

✗ ✙ ✚ 1.19 Recovery of your vehicle air bag system modification ✗ ✙ ✎ ✎ ✘ ✏ electric height adjustment ✗ ✛ ✎ Refuelling air bags ✗ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✏ ➊

✗ ✏ ✚ electric seat and mirror memory Replacement battery air bags Out Of Position (OOP) ✗ ✗ ✎

✚ ✗ electric seat lumbar adjustment Replacing ➊ battery ✚ ✎ ✗ ✚ ✎ ✏ ✙ ✗ ➊ bulbs ✱ heating ❼ ✎ ✗ fuel ✗ ✘ ✗ ✘ ✗ ➊ fuse ✗ ✚ manual adjustment ❻ mirrors ✎ ✗ ✗ ➊ ❻ key fob battery ❻

✗ ✙ ✚ manual backrest rake adjustment replacement of air bags ✚ ✏ ➊ vehicle battery manual forward and rearward adjustment ✗ ✘ ✎ seat belts ✙ ✚ ➊ wiper blade ✗ ✘ ✗ 1.17 seats ✗ ✛ ✎ ✗ ✗ Restraint system ❻

✗ ✗ manual height adjustment ➊ Sealant - tire ✗ ✚ ➊ ✗ ✗ child ❻ ✎ ✙ ✎ Seamless Shift Gearbox racing seat adjustment ✗ ❼ ✚ ✗ ✘ ✗ ✎ ✙ ✎ KISI child seat function gear positions safety ✗ ✛ ✎ ✏ ✗ ✏ ✛ ✗ ✱ ❻ ✎ ✚ ✎ supplementary gearshift paddles stowage pocket ✗ ✘ ✚ ✙ ✎ ➊ ✎ ✗ ✎ tether straps kickdown Secondary fuse box ❦ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✙ ✎ ✔ ✡ ✔ ✓ ✦ ✚ ✏ ✎ ❼ ✙ ✗ ➊ Start button pulse Summer tires ✎ ✚ ✏ ✛ ✗ Sensors START/STOP button Sun visors ✎ ✎ ✗ ✛ ✎ ✗ ❼ ✗ interior motion Starting and driving Supplementary Restraint System ✎ ✙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✎ ❼ ✗ parking foot brake Switch - lighting ✏ ✘ ✎ ✘ ✏ ✛ ✗ Service and Warranty gear positions Switching air conditioning on/off ✎ ✚ ✎ ❻ ✗ ✗ ✗ Service cover gearshift paddles Switching on the ignition ➊ ✗ ✎ ✗ ✎ ✏ closing instruments and warning lights Symbols ✎ ✏ ✗ ✗ ✗ opening main instruments ✚ ✛ ✎ ✛ Service interval parking brake T ❼ ✎ ✗ ✎ ✗ ✗ Service products starting the engine ✗ ✗ ➊ ✎ ✚

Setting up warning triangle ✚ ✎ ✠ ✡ ✌ ✡ ✧ ✒ ✑ ✝ ✟ ❚ switching on the ignition ✚ ❼ ✗ ✎ Settings ➊ ❼ ✏ warning lights Technical data ✚ ❼ ✗ ✎ ✗ ✗

display set-up ❼ Starting the engine ➊ engine ✚ ✗ ❻ ❼ ✎ ➊

external lighting ❼ ❼ discharged key fob battery gear ratios ✚ ✛ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✎ internal lighting ❼ ❼ Steering column speeds - in gear ✚ ✘ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✎

language ❼ ✗ ✗ electrical adjustment tire pressures ✚ ✗ ❻ ✗ ✏ ✎

lighting ❼ ✙ ✗ manual adjustment turning circle ✚ ✘ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✎ time & date ❼ ✘ Steering wheel vehicle dimensions ✚ ❼ ✗ ✗ ✏ ✎

units ❼ ✏ electrical adjustment vehicle operating temperatures ✚ ✛ ✗ ✗ ❼ ✎

vehicle ❼ horn ❻ vehicle weights ✗ ❻ ✗ ✏ ✎ Settings - individual unlock ❼ ✙ ✗ manual adjustment wheel and tire sizes ✗ ✗ ✚ ✎ ✗ ✗ Side head air bags ❼ ✏ ✗ Stopping the engine Technical glossary ✗ ✎ ✏ ✏ ✘ ✗ Sidelamps ✏ Stowage compartments Temperature - climate ❻ control ✚ ✏ ✎ ✏ ✘ ✗ Silent lock ✚ ✘ center console Temperature display ✎ ✙ ➊ ✏ ✗ Snow socks ❻ ✗ ✎ door Tensioners ❻ - seat belt ❼ ✎ ✗ ✏ ✗ ✏ ✛ ✗ Specification - engine oil ✱ ❻ ✚ ✘ ✗ seat Time & date settings ✚ ✚ ✏ ✗ Speedometer ➊ ✚ ✙ ✗ Stowage net Tire monitoring ❼ ❼ ✗ Speeds - in gear ➊ ❼ ✗ ✗ Stowing the key fob Tire pressures ❧ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✚ ✎ ✌ ✡ ✡ ✠ ✥ ❚ ✙ ✗ ✚ ✛ ➊ ❑ ✴ ➊ Triangle - warning error messages ✚ ✘ ✚ ✚ ➊ ✚ ✙ ✗ Tires Trip McLaren track telemetry ✚ ✚ ✗ ✏ ✏ ➊ ✚ ✙ ✗ asymmetric Turn signals MTT ❼ ✙ ✗ ✏ ✚ ➊ ✚ ✙ ✗ inspecting Turning circle oil status ✚ ✚ ➊ ✚ ✛ markings service interval ✎ ✘ ✚ ✚ ✙ ✗ monitoring system tire monitoring U ✎ ✘ ✚ ✚ ✗ ✗ pressure monitoring vehicle identification ✚ ❼ ✗ ✗ ✱ ➊ ➊ ✎ ✏ ➊

pressures ✚ ❼ ✗ ✔ ✌ ✥ ☛ ❪ Vehicle lifting points ❼ ✚ ➊ ✚ ✛ ✗ ✏ ✎ repair kit Unlocking - discharged ➊ battery Vehicle settings ✚ ✚ ✎ ✗ ✗ ➊ sealant Unlocking and opening the luggage compart- auto alarm ✚ ✚ ✎ ❼ ✙ ✗ ✗ ✎ ✗ summer ment auto door lock ✚ ✚ ✎ ✎ ✛ ✚ ✗ temperature monitoring Unlocking ❻ from inside auto fold mirrors ✚ ❼ ✎ ❼ ✙ ✗ ✗ ✚ ✗ winter Unlocking from outside ✱ ➊ defaults ✚ ✏ ✎ ✎ ➊ ✎ ✏ ✏ Topping up Upper speed limit door unlock ❻ ➊ ✚ ✏ ✎ ✎ ✏ ✏ brake fluid setting reverse mirror dip ❼ ➊ ✚ ✏ ✎ ✏ ✗ ✎ coolant USB sockets silent lock ✚ ➊ ✏ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✏ ✎ engine oil McLaren track telemetry start button pulse ➊ ➊ ✏ ✗ ✎ ✚ ✎ gearbox oil media ➊ tire type ✘ ➊ ✚ ✎ ✎ power steering fluid valet mode ✛ ➊ ✚ ✎ windscreen washers ➊ wiper modes V ✗ ✗ ➊ ✚ ❼ ✎ Tow-away protection wiper sensitivity ✏ ✏ ➊ ❼ ❼ Towing Vehicle speeds ✚ ✎ ✎ ✡ ✤ ✒ ✧ ✌ ✡ ✍ ✟ ✎ ✗ ➊ ✎ ✗ ✗ eye Vehicle starting ❼ ✘ Vehicle dimensions ❼ ❼ ✎ Track driving discharged key fob➊ battery ✎ ✎ Vehicle electrical status ✎ ✗ ❻ ✏ ✚ ✗ Track telemetry Vehicle tracking ✚ ✗ ✗ Vehicle identification ✎ ❼ ✏ ✎ ✏ Track use ➊ Vehicle use ❼ ✚ Vehicle identification number ✏ ✚ ✗ ✚ Tracking system ➊ ❻ Vehicle washing ✚ ✛ Vehicle info ✎ ✏ ✚ ❼ Traction control system ❻ Vehicle weights ✚ ✗ ✗ battery status ➦ ♦ ❦ INDEX ✏ ✙ ✗ ✔ ✌ ☛ ✡ ❼ ✙ ✗ Wheel and tire sizes ❼ ✙ ✗ ✗ ❼ ✗ Volumetric alarm Wheel sizes ✎ ✚ ➊ Wheels ✏ ✚ ➊ inspecting W ❼ ✚ ➊ interchanging ✎ ✚ ➊ Wheels and tires ✎ ✍ ✡ ◆ ✡ ✍ ✍ ✥ ✒ ☛ ☛ ✡ ✥ ✡ ☛ ☛ ✥ ✠ ✟ ❯ ➊ ➩ ✳ ✳ ✏ ✘ Window demisting - climate control ✏ Warning - engine oil temperature ➊ ✏ ✎ Warning light Windows ✏ ✚ anti-trap protection ✎ ✎ ✚ Anti-lock Braking System ✏ ✎ opening and closing ✎ ✙ ✗ brakes ✛ Windscreen➊ washers ✎ ✏ ✗ engine ✗ ❼ ✏ Windscreen wipers ✗ ✛ ✎ seat belt ✗ ❼ ✏ rain sensor ✗ ✏ ✚ Supplementary Restraint System ✗ ✘ ✏ Warning lights single wipe ✗ ✘ ✏ wash/wipe ✎ ➊ left-hand side ✙ ✚ wiper blade replacement➊ ✎ ❼ right-hand side ✚ ✎ ➊ wiper modes ✙ ✗ ➊ Warning triangle ✚ ❼ ✎ wiper sensitivity ✛ ➊ Washers ✎ ✙ ➊ Winter driving ✛ ➊ windscreen ❼ ✙ ✗ Winter tires ✚ ➊ ❻ Washing ✙ ✚ Wiper blade ➊ replacement ✚ ➊ ❻ exterior ✚ ✎ ➊ Wiper modes ✛ ✚ ➊ wheels ✚ ❼ ✎ Wiper sensitivity ✚ ❼ ✚ Water temperature display ✗ ✎ Wearing ❻ seat belts ❼ ❻ Weights ✗ ✏ ✎ Wheel - steering ✗ ✏ ✎ electrical adjustment ✗ ✏ ✎ manual adjustment ➨ ♥ ♦ ❦

CARS.McLAREN.COM